JP2021049154A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine that increases interest of a game.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: first variation display means capable of displaying a first variation display game based on satisfaction of a first start condition of start conditions, as a variation display game; second variation display means capable of displaying a second variation display game based on satisfaction of a second start condition of the start conditions; game control means for controlling the first variation display means and the second variation display means; performance display means corresponding to the variation display game and capable of displaying a decorative game for variably displaying an identification symbol; and performance control means for controlling the performance display means. Game state control means can generate specific game states ST12, ST13 after generating a special game state when a predetermined result (normal big winning, probability variation A big winning) is derived among the special results. The performance control means can execute a performance in the specific game states ST12, ST13 generated after the special game state is generated.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 30

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of executing a game based on the establishment of a starting condition and generating a special gaming state in which a gaming value is given to a player when the result of the game becomes a special result.

Conventionally, when the stop result of the variable display game is the first special result (big hit), the first special game state is generated, and when the stop result of the variable display game is the second special result (small hit),
A gaming machine that generates a second special gaming state in which the gaming value that can be acquired by the player is smaller than that of the first special gaming state is known (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2019-97703

However, the conventional game results alone have not been enough to enhance the interest of the game.
An object of the present invention is to enhance the interest of the game.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1 is
In a game machine capable of executing a variable display game based on the establishment of a start condition and generating a special game state in which a game value is given to a player when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result.
Ordinary variable winning device and
A game state control means capable of generating a normal game state, a specific game state in which it is easier to win a prize in the normal variable winning device than the normal game state, and the special game state.
As the variation display game, a first variation display means capable of displaying a first variation display game based on the establishment of the first start condition among the start conditions, and a first variation display means.
As the variation display game, a second variation display means capable of displaying a second variation display game based on the establishment of the second start condition among the start conditions, and a second variation display means.
A game control means for controlling the first variation display means and the second variation display means,
An effect display means capable of displaying a decorative game that fluctuates and displays an identification symbol corresponding to the variable display game
The effect control means for controlling the effect display means is provided.
The game state control means
When the result of the variable display game is a predetermined result of the special results, the specific gaming state can be generated after the special gaming state is generated.
The effect control means is characterized in that the effect can be executed in the specific game state generated after the special game state occurs.

According to the present invention, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

It is a front view of the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which looked at the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is an enlarged explanatory view which shows the detail of a batch display device. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a game machine. It is a flowchart explaining the main process. It is a flowchart explaining the main process. It is a flowchart explaining the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure game processing. It is a flowchart explaining the start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining the common processing of a special figure start port switch. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure hold information determination process. Special figure It is a flowchart explaining the usual processing. FIG. 1 is a flowchart illustrating a special figure 1 fluctuation start process and a special figure 2 change start process. It is a flowchart explaining the main processing of an effect control device. It is a flowchart explaining the received command check process. It is a flowchart explaining the received command analysis process. It is a figure explaining the special figure variation display game in a batch display device and the variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) in a display device. It is a figure explaining the special figure variation display game in a batch display device and the variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) in a display device. It is a figure explaining the special figure variation display game in a batch display device and the variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) in a display device. It is a figure explaining the special figure variation display game in a batch display device and the variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) in a display device. It is a figure explaining the special figure variation display game in a batch display device and the variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) in a display device. It is a figure explaining the special figure variation display game in a batch display device and the variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) in a display device. It is a figure explaining the special figure variation display game in a batch display device and the variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) in a display device. It is a figure explaining the special figure variation display game in a batch display device and the variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) in a display device. It is a figure explaining the special figure variation display game in a batch display device and the variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) in a display device. It is a figure explaining the special figure variation display game in a batch display device and the variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) in a display device. It is a figure which shows an example of the distribution rate of the result of the special symbol variation display game, the distribution rate of a big hit symbol, the distribution rate of a small hit symbol, and the distribution rate of a symbol per support in the second embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of the gaming state in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the support number in the case where the support hit is derived during the normal electric support. It is a figure explaining the support number in the case where the support hit is derived during the normal electric support. It is a flowchart explaining the hard random number acquisition process of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure start port switch common processing of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure hold information determination process of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot flag 1 setting process and the jackpot flag 2 setting process of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the big hit determination process and the small hit determination process of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the support hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process of 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 2 is a flowchart illustrating a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process of the second embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the process during special figure variation of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the process of displaying a special figure of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the process of displaying a special figure of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the time shortening variation number update process of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the effect mode information check process of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the fanfare / inter-interval process transition setting process 1 of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process in small hit fanfare of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the support operation setting process. The special figure of the 2nd Embodiment is a flowchart explaining the normal process transition setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot end processing of 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot end setting process 1 and the jackpot end setting process 2 of the second embodiment. It is a figure explaining the special figure variation display game that the result is "per support". It is a figure explaining the special figure variation display game that the result is "per support". It is a figure explaining the special figure variation display game that the result is "per support". It is a figure explaining the special figure variation display game that the result is "per support". It is a figure explaining the special figure variation display game that the result is "per support". It is a figure explaining the special figure variation display game that the result is "per support". It is a figure explaining the special figure variation display game that the result is "per support". It is a figure explaining the special figure variation display game that the result is "per support". It is a figure which shows an example of the case where the pseudo continuous effect is executed as the special effect performed in the variable display game which the result is "per support". It is a figure which shows an example of the additional effect performed after the end of the special figure variation display game in which the result is "per support". It is a figure explaining the modification 1 of the support hit determination in 2nd Embodiment, and is the figure which shows an example of the fractionation rate. It is a figure explaining the modification 1 of the support hit determination in 2nd Embodiment, and is the flowchart explaining the special figure start port switch common processing. It is a figure explaining the modification 1 of the support hit determination in 2nd Embodiment, and is the flowchart explaining the jackpot flag 1 setting process and the jackpot flag 2 setting process. It is a figure explaining the modification 1 of the support hit determination in 2nd Embodiment, and is the flowchart explaining the support hit determination process. It is a figure explaining the modification 2 of the support hit determination in 2nd Embodiment, and is the figure which shows the fractionation rate. It is a front view of the game board of 3rd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of the game machine of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the fractionation rate in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the transition of the gaming state in 3rd Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
FIG. 1 is a front view of the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, and FIG. 2 is a front side perspective view of the game machine 10 of the present embodiment.
As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the game machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12
Is assembled to the outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be openable and rotatable. The game board 30 (see FIG. 3) is housed in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame (transparent plate holding frame) 15 provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

A model name and the like display unit 16 for displaying the model name and the like of the game machine 10 is provided on the upper part of the glass frame 15.
In addition, lamps, LEDs, etc. are built into the left and right sides of the glass frame 15 for decoration and production, and notification when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a payout abnormality occurs, the lamp, LED, etc. are displayed in an abnormality notification color (for example, red). A frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (blinking) with (), and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effect) are provided. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is also provided below the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the abnormality content is notified by voice from the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b. A lamp for notifying the payout abnormality may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

Further, in the lower part of the glass frame 15, an upper plate (storage plate) 21 for supplying a game ball to a hitting ball launching device (not shown) and a game ball paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the game machine 10 An outlet 22 and the like for the upper plate ball to flow out are provided. Further, the upper edge portion of the upper plate 21 is provided with an effect button 25 having a built-in effect button switch 25a (see FIG. 6) for receiving a pressing operation input from the player. Further, the effect button 25 also has a built-in drive source for vibrating the effect button 25. That is, the game machine 10 of the present embodiment has a vibration function that gives a predetermined notification by vibrating the effect button 25. The effect button 25 is configured to be convertible from a normal state (the state shown in FIGS. 1 and 2) to a protruding state (a state in which the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25 is above the normal state). You may.

At the lower part of the front frame 12, a lower plate (receiver) 23 for storing the game balls paid out when the upper plate 21 is full, an operation unit 24 of the hitting ball launching device, and the like are provided. Further, the front frame 12
A keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the above.

Further, to the right of the effect button 25, there is a lending button (ball lending button) 27a that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and a prepaid card is ejected from the card unit of the ball lending machine. Return button (discharge button) 27b to operate, balance indicator (balance display) 27c to display the balance of the prepaid card, upper plate operation lever to operate to let the game ball in the upper plate 21 flow down to the lower plate 23. 27d, a mobile terminal holder 28 and the like for placing a mobile terminal such as a smartphone owned by the player are provided. Further, on the left side of the effect button 25, a volume adjusting button 27e, a cross key 29, and the like are provided.
In the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player rotates the operation unit 24 to launch the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 toward the game area 32 on the front surface of the game board 30. To do. In addition, when the player operates the effect button 25 and the cross key 29, the player can operate the effect button 25 and the cross key 29.
In the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) in the display device 41 (see FIG. 3), it is possible to perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened.

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 3, the game board 30 is a flat plate-shaped game board main body 8 that serves as a mounting base for various members.
It has 0. The game board main body 80 is made of wood or synthetic resin, and the front surface of the game board main body 80 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and an outer peripheral wall (guide rail) 31 provided at each of the four corners of the game board 30. The game area 32 is provided. The game machine 10 is configured to launch a game ball from a hitting ball launching device into a game area 32 surrounded by an outer peripheral wall 31 to play a game. A windmill, an obstacle nail, or the like is arranged in the game area 32 as a member for changing the flow direction of the game ball, and the launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

A center case 40 that forms a window portion that serves as a display area for a variable display game is attached to substantially the center of the game area 32. Behind the window portion formed in the center case 40, a display device 41 as an effect display device (variable display device) for variablely displaying a plurality of identification information is arranged.

The display device 41 (variable display device) is composed of, for example, a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) and a CRT (cathode ray tube). Still images and moving images can be displayed as effect images in the area (display area) where the image of the display screen can be displayed. Information about the game such as a background image that enhances the effect is displayed. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variablely displayed (variable display), and a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is performed. In addition, an image for producing an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen.

In the center case 40, a warp flow path forming member 614 that forms a warp flow path for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a game ball that has passed through the warp flow path roll. A possible stage portion 620 is provided. Since the stage portion 620 of the center case 40 is arranged above the start winning opening 36, the game ball rolled on the stage portion 620 can easily win the starting winning opening 36.
Further, on the upper part of the center case 40, a board effecting device 44 that produces a game by operating is provided. The board effect device 44 can be operated from the state shown in FIG. 3 toward the center of the display device 41.

A normal symbol start gate (normal symbol start gate) 34 is provided in the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40. Inside the normal drawing start gate 34, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 5) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal drawing start gate 34 is provided. When the game ball driven into the game area 32 passes through the normal map start gate 34, the normal map variation display game is executed.

Two general winning openings 35 are arranged in the lower left game area 32 of the center case 40, and one general winning opening 35 is arranged in the lower right game area 32 of the center case 40. The winning of the game ball into the general winning opening 35 is detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 5) provided in the general winning opening 35.

The game area 32 below the center case 40 is provided with a start winning opening 36 (first start winning area) that gives a start condition for the special figure 1 variation display game (first special figure variation display game). The game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 5).

On the right side of the center case 40, a normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning area) that gives a start condition for the special figure 2 variable display game (second special figure variable display game) is provided. The game ball that has won the ordinary variable winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 5).
The ordinary variable winning device 37 includes a movable member (not shown), and the movable member always holds a closed closed state (a state disadvantageous to the player) in which the game ball cannot flow in. Then, when the result of the normal fluctuation display game is a predetermined result, the game ball is easily flowed into the normal fluctuation winning device 37 by the normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 5) as a driving device (game). It is designed to be changed to a state that is advantageous to the person.

In the present embodiment, the movable member of the ordinary variable winning device 37 is the normal electric solenoid 37.
It is a so-called tongue-type ordinary electric accessory that opens and closes by advancing and retreating (sliding) in the front-rear direction by c, but the movable member of the ordinary variable winning device 37 is not limited to this. Ordinary variable winning device 3
The movable member of No. 7 may be, for example, an attacker-type ordinary electric accessory that is opened by rotating the upper end side in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted toward the front side by the normal electric solenoid 37c, or a reverse “c It may be a tulip-shaped ordinary electric accessory that opens in the shape of "".
Further, the normal variable winning device 37 enables the winning of the game ball even when the movable member is closed, and the game ball may be more difficult to win in the closed state than in the open state.

Of the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, between the normal figure start gate 34 and the normal variation winning device 37, the game ball is not accepted or easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. A convertible first special variable winning device (upper large winning opening) 38 is provided. In the first special variable winning device 38, the opening / closing member (not shown) moves forward and backward (slides).
By doing so, the upper prize opening is converted into a state in which a game ball can flow in. 1st special variable winning device 3
In No. 8, the player is given a predetermined value by converting the upper prize opening from the closed state to the open state according to the result of the special figure variation display game and facilitating the inflow of the game ball into the upper prize opening. The game value (prize ball) is given. The game ball that has won the first special variable winning device 38 is detected by the large winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 5).

Inside the upper prize opening (winning area), a specific area where game balls can flow in is provided, and a lever solenoid 38f is provided so as to change the inflow probability of the game balls into the specific area.
A lever member that operates according to (see FIG. 5) is provided. A specific area switch 38d (see FIG. 5) capable of detecting the inflow of the game ball is provided in the specific area, and based on the detection of the game ball by the specific area switch 38d, a state advantageous for the player can be obtained. It occurs (in the present embodiment, a high probability state occurs after the end of the special gaming state). The game ball that has flowed into the specific area is discharged to the outside of the first special variable winning device 38.

Further, inside the upper prize opening, a residual ball discharge port switch 38e (see FIG. 5) for detecting a game ball discharged to the outside of the first special variable winning device 38 without flowing into a specific area is provided. ing. The number of game balls detected by the large prize opening switch 38a provided inside the upper large winning opening (the number of game balls that have flowed into the upper large winning opening), the specific area switch 38d, and the remaining ball discharge port switch 38.
By matching the number of game balls detected in e (the number of game balls discharged from the upper prize opening), it can be confirmed that all the game balls in the upper prize opening have been discharged, and basically this confirmation. Until the end of the event, the new top prize opening will not be opened.

In the game area 32 below the center case 40, on the right side of the start winning opening 36, there is a second special variable winning that can be converted into a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which the game ball is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. A device (lower prize opening) 39 is provided. 2nd special variable winning device 3
In No. 9, the opening / closing member (not shown) moves back and forth (slides) in the front-rear direction to convert the lower prize opening into a state in which the game ball can flow in. The second special variable winning device 39 converts the lower large winning opening from the closed state to the open state according to the result of the special figure variation display game, and facilitates the inflow of the game ball into the lower large winning opening. , A predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. The game ball that has won the second special variable winning device 39 is detected by the large winning opening switch (count switch) 39a (see FIG. 5).

The game area 32 below the starting winning opening 36 is provided with an out opening 30a for collecting game balls that have not won in the winning opening or the like. Further, the game board main body 80 is outside the game area 32.
In the lower right corner of, the special figure variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game, special figure 2 variable display game)
And a batch display device 50 for executing a normal map variation display game is provided.

As shown in FIG. 4A, for example, the batch display device 50 includes a special figure 1 display (first special figure variation display unit) 51 (A0 to A7) and a special figure 2 variation for a special figure 1 variation display game. Special figure 2 display (2nd special figure variation display unit) 52 (B0 to B7) for display game and special figure 1 hold display 53 (C0, C1) for notification of start memory number of special figure 1 variation display game ) And a special figure 2 hold display 54 (C2, C3) for notifying the start memory number of the special figure 2 variable display game.

Further, the batch display device 50 has a round display unit 55 (D0 to D3) for displaying the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times of opening and closing of the special variable winning devices 38 and 39) and a gaming state for displaying the gaming state of the gaming machine 10. It is provided with a display unit 56 (C6, C7, D7). This game state display unit 56
The first game state display unit 56a (C6), which notifies the player of the left-handed (normal) or right-handed hitting method (the hitting method corresponding to the game state), and the time saving state (shortening the fluctuation time). The second game state display unit 56b (C7) that notifies that the function is operating), and the third game state display unit that notifies that the jackpot probability state is in the high probability state when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on. 56c
(D7) is provided.
Further, the batch display device 50 is a general map display 57 (D4 to D6) for a general map variable display game.
, The general map holding display 58 (C4, C5) for notifying the start memory number of the normal map fluctuation display game is provided.

The special figure variable display game on the special figure 1 display 51 is the execution time of the special figure 1 variable display game (
During the fluctuation time), for example, as shown in FIG. 4 (b), the fluctuation symbol numbers are alternately changed to L.
ED lamps A0, A2, A4, A6 are lit (LED lamps A1, A3, A5, A
7 is off state) and LED lamps A1, A3, A5, A7 are on (LED lamp A)
By alternately switching between 0, A2, A4, and A6 (the lights are off), it is displayed that the fluctuation is in progress. The switching cycle is set to, for example, 60 msec. Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts, when the result of the game is "off", the result mode of the off (for example, LED lamp A0 is turned on and LED lamp A1 is turned on. ~ A7 is turned off), and when the result of the game is "hit", the result mode (special result mode) is a result mode other than the out-of-order result mode (for example, at least among the LED lamps A0 to A7). The game result is displayed in the mode (a mode in which the three are turned on). The special figure 1 display 51 may be composed of a 7-segment type display.

The special figure variation display game on the special figure 2 display 52 is the execution time of the special figure 2 variation display game (
During the fluctuation time), for example, as shown in FIG. 4 (c), the fluctuation symbol numbers are alternately changed to L.
ED lamps B0, B2, B4, B6 are lit (LED lamps B1, B3, B5, B
7 is off state) and LED lamps B1, B3, B5, B7 are on (LED lamp B)
By alternately switching between 0, B2, B4, and B6 (the lights are off), it is displayed that the fluctuation is in progress. The switching cycle is set to, for example, 60 msec. Then, when the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts, when the result of the game is "off", the result mode of the off (for example, LED lamp B0 is turned on and LED lamp B1 is turned on. ~ B7 is turned off), and when the result of the game is "hit", the result mode (special result mode) of the hit is at least one of the result modes other than the missed result mode (for example, LED lamps B0 to B7). The game result is displayed in the mode (a mode in which the three are turned on). The special figure 2 display 52 may be composed of a 7-segment type display.

The special figure 1 hold indicator 53 determines the number of undigested balls (starting memory number = hold number) among the number of winning balls to the start winning opening 36, which is a variable start condition of the special figure 1 display 51, for example, FIG. As shown in (d), the display is performed by turning off, turning on, and blinking a plurality of LEDs (LED lamps C0 and C1). The blinking cycle is set to, for example, 128 msec.
The special figure 2 hold display 54 is a normal fluctuation winning device 3 which is a fluctuation start condition of the special figure 2 display 52.
Of the number of winning balls to 7, the number of undigested balls (starting memory number = holding number) is, for example, as shown in FIG. 4 (d), a plurality of LEDs (LED lamps C2 and C3) are turned off, turned on, and blinked. Display by.
The blinking cycle is set to, for example, 128 msec.

The round display unit 55 is used for all LEDs (LED lamp D) when not in the special gaming state.
0 to D3) are turned off, and during the special game state, the LED is turned on according to the number of rounds selected according to the result, for example, as shown in FIG. 4 (e). The round display unit 55 may be composed of a 7-segment type display.

As shown in FIG. 4 (f), for example, the first game state display unit 56a turns off the LED when the left-handed hit is more advantageous to the player than the right-handed hit (during normal hit). , When the right-handed is more advantageous to the player than the left-handed (when right-handed), the LED is turned on.
As shown in FIG. 4 (f), for example, the second game state display unit 56b turns on the LED when the time is shortened, and turns off the LED when the time is not shortened.
As shown in FIG. 4 (f), for example, the third game state display unit 56c turns on the LED when it is in a high probability state when the power is turned on, and turns off the LED when it is not in a high probability state.

During the fluctuation display of the normal map fluctuation display game, the normal map fluctuation display game on the normal map display 57 is displayed.
For example, as shown in FIG. 4 (g), by alternately changing the variation symbol number, the mode in which the LED lamp D5 is lit and the mode in which the LED lamps D4 and D6 are lit are alternately switched. Indicates that it is changing. The switching cycle is set to, for example, 60 msec.
Then, when the result is "hit", one of the plurality of LEDs (for example, LED lamp D4) is turned on to indicate that the result is "hit", and when the result is "missing", a plurality of LEs are used.
Any one of D (for example, LED lamps D5 and D6) is turned on to indicate that it is out of order.
The normal figure hold indicator 58 determines the number of undigested balls (the number of normal figure start storage = the number of hold) among the number of passing balls of the normal figure start gate 34, which is a fluctuation start condition of the normal figure display 57, for example, FIG. As shown in (h), the display is performed by turning off, turning on, and blinking a plurality of LEDs (LED lamps C4 and C5).

FIG. 5 is a block diagram of the control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100, and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that collectively controls a game, and a game microcomputer (hereinafter, referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. It is composed of a CPU unit 110 having a CPU unit 110, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like, and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130. ..

The CPU unit 110 is a gaming microcomputer (CP) called an amusement chip (IC).
It includes a U) 111, an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 that generates an operating clock of a CPU, a timer interrupt, and a clock that serves as a reference for a random number generation circuit. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 include DC32V, DC12V, and DC5 generated by the power supply device 400.
A predetermined level of DC voltage such as V is supplied to enable operation.

The power supply device 400 is an AC-DC that generates a DC voltage of DC32V from a 24V AC power supply.
A normal power supply unit 410 having a converter, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V, DC5V, etc. from a DC32V voltage, and a game microcomputer 1
A backup power supply unit 420 that supplies a power supply voltage to the internal RAM of 11 in the event of a power failure,
It has a power failure monitoring circuit, and includes a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal that notify the occurrence and recovery of a power failure in the game control device 100.

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, that is, the main unit. It may be configured to be provided on the substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are mounted on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment. By providing the above, it is possible to reduce the cost by excluding it from the target of replacement.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 (
In particular, the data supplied to the built-in RAM) and stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or power failure. That is, the game control device 100 can store and retain information about the game even if a power failure occurs and the power supply to the game machine is stopped, and after the power failure is restored, the game can be restarted based on the stored information. It serves as a means for retaining the memory of game information.
The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it drops to 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. This R
When the AM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, a process of forcibly initializing the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200. Is done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. A reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal that resets the entire control system.

The game microcomputer 111 is a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A.
, Read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111B and RA that can be read and written at any time
It includes M (random access memory) 111C.

The ROM 111B non-volatilely stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 111C stores the work area of the CPU 111A and various signals and random number values during game control. It is used as. ROM111B or RAM11
As 1C, an electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as EEPROM may be used.

Further, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect content, the presence / absence of the occurrence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to refer to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start memory to determine the variation pattern. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a missed fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is missed, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include a table for determining the latter half fluctuation pattern, which is a fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), and fluctuation before reaching the reach state. A table for determining the first half fluctuation pattern, which is a pattern (first half fluctuation group table, first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. When the special result mode is adopted, the gaming state is advantageous for the player (special gaming state).
At the stage where some of the plurality of display results have not yet been derived and displayed in the game machine 10
A display state in which the display result that has already been derived and displayed satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result reaches the stage before the derivation display. Refers to a display mode that does not exist. Further, for example, a state in which variation display is performed by a plurality of variation display areas (so-called full rotation reach) while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are aligned is also included in the reach state. The reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display state when at least a part of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition of the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas of the display device. After the display, when the variation display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the left and right variation display areas satisfy the conditions for the special result mode (for example,). The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the fluctuation display of all the fluctuation display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition of the special result mode in any two of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas is satisfied (for example, the same). State that became identification information,
However, the special result mode may be set to the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variable-displayed from this reach state.

The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and as reach effects in which the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expected value is different), normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), and so on. Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), Special 3
Reach (SP3 reach) and premier reach are set. The expected value is no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <
It is getting higher in the order of premier reach. Further, this reach state is included in the variation display mode at least when the special result mode is derived (when it becomes a big hit) in the special figure variation display game. That is, it may be included in the variation display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variation display game (when it is out of order). Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. 10 Control the entire system. Further, although not shown, the game microcomputer 111 includes a jackpot random number for determining the hit of the special figure variation display game, a jackpot symbol random number for determining the jackpot symbol, and a variation pattern in the special figure variation display game (
Random generation to generate variation pattern random numbers for determining various reach and variation display game execution time in non-reach variation display, and hit random numbers for determining the hit of the general clock variation display game. It is provided with a circuit and a clock generator that generates a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) for the CPU 111A and a clock that gives an update timing of a random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. ing.

Further, the CPU 111A is the ROM 111B in the processing related to the special figure variation display game.
Acquire any one of the fluctuation pattern tables stored in. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result (big hit, small hit or miss) of the special figure variation display game, the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) of the special figure variation display game as the current game state. One of the fluctuation pattern tables is selected and acquired from the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables based on the number of start storages and the like. Here, CPU111A
Is a variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when the special figure variation display game is executed.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, ROM, RAM, input interface, output interface, etc., and drives the payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to drive the prize ball. Control to pay out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit, and controls for paying out the ball lending.

The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a panel radio wave sensor 62 that detects the emission of radio waves to the game machine, a starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36, a starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, and so on. The winning opening switch 35a in the general winning opening 35, the large winning opening switch 38a in the first special variable winning device 38, the large winning opening switch 39a in the second special variable winning device 39, and the gate switch in the general drawing start gate 34. 34a, the specific area switch 38d and the remaining ball discharge port switch 38e arranged in the first special variable winning device 38, and all the game balls (safe balls and out balls) that have been fired into the game area 32 and finished the game. An interface chip that is connected to the out-ball detection switch 32a to detect, inputs a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from these switches, and converts it into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V. (Proximity I / F) 121 is provided. Since the input range of the proximity I / F121 is 7V-11V, the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch is illegally shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is cut and floats. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state such as the above and output an abnormality detection signal.

The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123, the third input port 124, or the fourth input port 126, and is read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the large winning port switches 38a, 39a, and the gate switch 3
The detection signal of 4a is input to the second input port 123. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the specific area switch 38d, the remaining ball discharge port switch 38e, and the out ball detection switch 32a are input to the fourth input port 126. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124.

Further, in the third input port 124, a detection signal of the magnetic sensor 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the game machine 10, a detection signal of the vibration sensor 65 for detecting the vibration of the game machine 10,
The detection signal of the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10 and the detection signal of the main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 or the like of the game machine 10 are also input. It has become so.

Further, a signal from the setting key switch 152 for detecting the operation of the setting key operation unit is input to the third input port 124. The setting key operation unit is equipped with a keyhole for inserting the setting key.
It is configured so that the setting key can be turned from the first position to the second position (predetermined state) only when the corresponding setting key is inserted. The setting key switch 152 is a sensor that can detect that it is in the state of being turned to the second position, and is turned on when it is in the state of being turned to the second position, and is in the state of not being turned to the second position. In some cases, it turns off.

The RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key operation unit are operation units for selecting from a plurality of probability setting values to which probability values that give special results in the special figure variation display game are assigned, and operate these operation units. As a result, it is possible to select a probability setting value to which a probability value that gives a special result is assigned in the special figure fluctuation display game, and the probability value corresponding to the selected probability setting value is used in the game. There is. Here, six probability setting values, "setting 1" to "setting 6", are prepared.

When selecting the probability setting value, R with the setting key of the setting key operation unit turned to the second position.
By turning on the power of the game machine while operating (pressing) the AM initialization switch 112, the probability setting value can be changed to the probability setting value change mode, and the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated during the probability setting value change mode ( The probability setting value can be changed by pressing). The selected probability setting value is displayed on the performance display device 153 for displaying the calculated base value and the accessory ratio. Specifically, the performance display device 153 displays the probability set value information while the operation related to the probability set value is being performed (during the probability set value change mode and the probability set value confirmation mode), and other than that. In, the calculated base value and the accessory ratio are displayed.

In addition, the setting key of the setting key operation unit is turned to the second position (RAM initialization switch 11).
By turning on the power of the game machine in (2 is not operated), the probability setting value currently selected is displayed on the performance display device 153, but the probability setting value cannot be changed in the probability setting value confirmation mode. The RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key operation unit cannot be operated unless the front frame 12 is opened.
The performance display device 153 is a 7-segment type display, and displays the probability set value as a number from 1 to 6. Of course, the display mode is not limited to this, and any display mode that can recognize the probability set value may be used. In addition, other types of display devices such as liquid crystal display devices may be used.
The probability set value may be indicated by the lighting mode of one or a plurality of LEDs, the emission color, and the like.

Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 and the output to the fourth input port 126 (excluding the detection signal of the out ball detection switch 32a) are the main board 100.
Is also supplied to a test firing test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37
The detection signal of a is configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123.

As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V in addition to the voltage such as 5V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It has become.

The data held by the second input port 123 is an enable signal CE by decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123 by the gaming microcomputer 111.
It can be read by asserting 2 (changing to a valid level). The same applies to the third input port 124, the fourth input port 126, and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, the input unit 120 receives a frame radio wave illegal signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 detecting a radio wave) and a payout busy signal (payout control device). 200 indicates whether or not the command can be accepted), payout abnormality status signal (status signal indicating payout abnormality), shoot ball out switch signal (signal indicating shortage of game balls before payout), overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (it is full)), and a touch switch signal (for input of a touch switch provided on the operation unit 24). A first input port 122 is provided which takes in (based on a signal) and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting a signal such as a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 or the like, and the Schmidt buffer 125 is provided with these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from.
The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122, and are taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 that receive signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET whose noise has been removed by the Schmidt buffer 125 is
It is directly input to the reset terminal provided on the game microcomputer 111 and supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is output directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, so that the test firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 is turned off in order to output to the test firing test apparatus. It is configured as follows. Further, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RESET is used for each port 122, 123, of the input unit 120.
It is not supplied to 124 and 126. The data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset in order to prevent system malfunction, but each of the input units 120 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the game microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the game microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that the one-way communication is such that a signal cannot be input to the game control device 100 from the effect control device 300 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data for notifying the special symbol information of the variable display game to the test firing test device of the accreditation body (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the jackpot, and the like via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass production product) installed in a game store. The detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a start port switch output from the proximity I / F 121, is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal that cannot be supplied to the test firing test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor 61, the panel radio wave sensor 62, and the vibration sensor 65, is once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, a game. It is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test firing test device via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that the machine cannot control the game. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the switch detection signal that does not go through the buffer, and the like. There is. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a second output port 134 connected to the data bus 140. The second output port 134 is a first large winning opening solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 1) 38b for opening the first special variable winning device 38, and a second large winning opening solenoid (large) for opening the second special variable winning device 39. Winning port solenoid 2) 39b, 1st special variable winning device 38
The operation data of the lever solenoid 38f that operates the lever member inside and the normal electric solenoid 37c that opens the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is output, and the display data of the performance display device 153 that displays the currently selected probability setting value is displayed. This is a port for output.
Further, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the batch display device 50, and the batch display device 50. On / on the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected
A fourth output port 136 for outputting off-data is provided.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with information about the game machine 10, such as jackpot information, from the external information terminal plate 7.
A fifth output port 137 for outputting to 1 is provided. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device (information collection terminal, game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.) installed in a game store, and can provide information about the game machine 10. It can be supplied to an external device. Further, a launch permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmidt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 receives the operation data signals of the large winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b, the lever solenoid 38f, and the general electric solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal. It is output from the second driver 138b and the fourth output port 136 that output the on / off drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the driver (drive circuit) 138a and the third output port 135. The external information signal supplied from the third driver 138c and the fifth output port 137 that output the on / off drive signal of the digit line on the current drawing side of the batch display device 50 to the external device such as the management device is sent to the external information terminal board 71. A fourth driver 138d to output and a fifth driver 138e to generate and output a drive signal by receiving the display data signal of the performance display device 153 output from the second output port 134 are provided. Data is transmitted from the second output port 134 to the fifth driver 138e by serial communication.

DC32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. The fifth driver 138e has a D as a power supply voltage so that the performance display device 153 operating at 5 V can be driven.
C5V is supplied from the power supply device 400.
Further, the second driver 138b for driving the segment line of the batch display device 50 is equipped with DC1.
2V is supplied. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit wire is for pulling out the digit wire corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A dynamic drive system in which a second driver 138b that outputs 12V causes a current to flow into the anode terminal of the LED via the segment wire, and a third driver 138c that outputs a ground potential draws a current from the cathode terminal via the segment wire. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in step 2 and the LEDs are turned on.
The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71, supplies the external information signal with a level of 12V, so that DC12V is supplied.
The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each game machine to an external inspection device 500. Photocoupler 13
Reference numeral 9 denotes a game microcomputer 111, which is configured to be capable of bilateral communication so that data can be transmitted and received by serial communication with the inspection device 500. Since such data transmission / reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as input ports 122, 123, 124, 126 are provided. Absent.

Although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36,
The start port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the large winning port switches 38a, 39a, and the gate switch 34a in the ordinary variable winning device 37 are provided with a coil for magnetic detection, and the magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. A non-contact magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that detects a game ball by utilizing a phenomenon is used. Further, the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10 and the main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 or the like are microswitches having mechanical contacts. Can be used.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
The effect control device 300 is an amusement chip (IC) similar to the gaming microcomputer 111.
), And VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for displaying images on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. , Sound source LSI 314 that controls the sound output to reproduce various melody and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.
It has.

The main control microcomputer 311 is a P that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data.
Program ROM 321 consisting of ROM (programmable read-only memory), RAM 322 that provides a work area, Fe that can retain stored contents even if power is not supplied in the event of a power failure.
A RAM 323 and an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day of the week, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, determines the production content, and V.
It performs processing such as instructing the content of the output video to the DP 312, instructing the sound source LSI 314 of the reproduced sound, lighting the decorative lamp, controlling the drive of the motor and the solenoid, and managing the production time.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging / reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used for developing and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By sending and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be sent in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

A vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30 from the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311.
C, the synchronization signal STS that gives the data transmission timing is input. In addition, VDP312
Waits to notify the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in VRAM. A signal WAIT or the like is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by an LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is transmitted to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

An audio ROM 327 in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via the address / data bus 340. Further, the interrupt signal INT from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311.
Is to be entered. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and the sound source LSI 314. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. The effect control command signal (effect command) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 via this command I / F331, such as a decoration special figure hold number command, a decoration special figure command, a variation command, and a stop information command. ). Game microcomputer 111 of game control device 100
Operates at DC 5V, and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V. Therefore, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 and a glass frame 15 for driving and controlling a board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). Frame decoration LED control circuit 333, game board 3 that drives and controls a frame decoration device (for example, frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an provided LED (light emitting diode).
Board effect device 44 (for example, display device 41) provided at 0 (including the center case 40)
A board effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided to drive and control a movable accessory (such as a movable accessory) that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display in the above. These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. Even if the glass frame 15 is provided with a frame effect device provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for effect) and is provided with a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device. good.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a cross key 29 provided on the glass frame 15, and an initial position of a motor in the board effect device 44. Production accessory switch 47 (production motor switch) that detects
The function of detecting the on / off state of the main control microcomputer 311 and inputting the detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 are detected and the detection signal is sent to the main control microcomputer 311. A switch input circuit 336 having a function of inputting is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 has the effect control device 300 having the above configuration.
DC32V for driving a motor or solenoid, a display device 41 consisting of a liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving a motor or LED, in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to or an electronic component controlled by the motor. DC5 which is the power supply voltage of command I / F331
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a voltage of DC15V for driving a motor, LED, and speaker. Furthermore, 3.3V or 1.2V as the main control microcomputer 311
When using an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as, DC 3.3V based on DC 5V
And a DC-DC converter for generating DC1.2V is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in the reset state. In addition, VDP312 (VDPSET signal) and sound source LSI314 are output from the main control microcomputer 311.
, The amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) that drives the speaker, and the control circuits 332-334 (IORESET signal) that drive and control lamps, motors, and the like are supplied to reset the state. Further, the effect control device 300 has a cooling FA that cools various parts of the game machine 10.
The cooling FAN 45 is driven when the N45 is connected and the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

In the following description, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure variable display game. Further, when the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, it is simply referred to as a decorative special figure variable display game. If the big hit (first special result) and the small hit (second special result) are not distinguished, they are simply hits (special result).
It is called. When the first special gaming state, which is a special gaming state based on a big hit, and the second special gaming state, which is a special gaming state based on a small hit, are not distinguished, it is simply referred to as a special gaming state.

The big hit is a special result (first special result) with the operation of the condition device, and the small hit is a special result (second special result) without the operation of the condition device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs (stop display of the big hit symbol) in the special figure fluctuation display game, and when the condition device operates, for example, a big hit state occurs and it is special as a special electric accessory. Variable winning device 38
, 39 means that a specific flag for continuously operating the accessory is set (the accessory continuous operation device is activated). The fact that the condition device does not operate means that the above-mentioned flag is not set as in the case where the small hit lottery is won, for example. The "conditional device" may be a software means such as a flag that is turned on / off by software as described above, or a hardware means such as a switch that is turned on / off electrically.
Further, the "condition device" is a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory.
It is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines, and is also used in the present specification as a term having the same meaning.

In the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game is performed by launching a game ball (pachinko ball) from the hit ball launcher toward the game area 32. The launched game ball is the game area 3
Flowing down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by the direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged in various places in 2, the general drawing start gate 34, the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, and the normal variable winning Whether to win the device 37, the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39,
It flows into the out port 30a provided at the lowermost part of the game area 32 and is discharged from the game area 32. Then, when the game ball wins in the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the first special variable winning device 38, or the second special variable winning device 39, the number according to the type of winning opening. The prize ball is discharged from the payout unit controlled by the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 5) to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23 of the glass frame 15.

In the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player adjusts the firing force and launches the game ball into the left game area (so-called left-handed) to move the starting winning opening 36 or the starting winning opening 36 to the left. It is possible to aim for a prize in the arranged general prize opening 35, and by launching a game ball into the right game area (so-called right-handed), the normal figure start gate 34, the normal variable winning device 37, and the first special variable winning It is possible to aim for a prize in the device 38, the second special variable winning device 39, and the general winning opening 35 arranged on the right side of the second special variable winning device 39.

A gate switch 34a including a non-contact type switch for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal drawing start gate 34 is provided in the normal drawing start gate 34, and the game area 32
When the game ball driven into the ball passes through the start gate 34 of the normal drawing, it is detected by the gate switch 34a. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the number of normal figure start storages is an upper limit number (for example, four) based on the input of the game ball detection signal from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal figure start gate 34. ), Add the number of memory for starting the normal figure (+1)
), And one memory for starting a normal figure is stored in the RAM 111C. The number of stored numbers of the winnings for starting the normal drawing is displayed on the general drawing holding display 58 of the batch display device 50. In addition, the hit determination random value (hit random value) for determining the result of the normal map variation display game extracted based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a is stored in the normal map start memory. It is supposed to be done.

Then, when there is a memory for starting the normal map and the normal variable display game can be started, that is, the normal variable display game is hit and the normal variable winning device 37 is converted to the open state, that is, the normal map variable display game is not running. If it is not in the hit state, the hit judgment random value stored in the first stored normal map start memory is compared with the judgment value stored in the ROM 111B to determine the hit / miss of the normal map variation display game. Then, the process of starting the normal map variation display game is performed. When the hit determination random number value matches the determination value, the normal map variation display game becomes a hit and a specific result mode (normal map specific result) is derived.

Further, as a process of executing the normal map variation display game, the game control device 100 presets a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns on the normal map display 57 provided in the batch display device 50 over a predetermined fluctuation time. After performing the display during the fluctuation of the normal map, which is repeatedly displayed in the order given, the process of displaying the variable display game of the normal map, which stops and displays the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result, is performed.
In addition, the general drawing display 57 is composed of a display device 41, and as ordinary identification information, for example, numbers, symbols,
It is also possible to use a character symbol or the like to display the variable for a predetermined time and then stop and display the result.

When the result of the normal fluctuation display game is a hit, the lighting pattern, which is a special result mode, is stopped and displayed on the normal figure display 57, and the normal variable winning device 37 is operated by operating the normal electric solenoid 37c. Control is performed to open the game for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds). That is, the game control device 100 serves as a conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member). If the result of the normal map variation display game is out of alignment, the normal map display 57 is controlled to display a lighting pattern that is the result of the deviation.

Further, the winning ball to the starting winning opening 36 and the winning ball to the normal variable winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a, respectively, which are provided inside.
In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4) of the first start memory that forms the start memory (special figure start memory) based on the winning of the start winning opening 36 is set.
The second start memory that forms the start memory (special figure start memory) based on the winning of the normal variable winning device 37 is stored up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4). Based on the winning of the starting winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37, the jackpot random number value, the jackpot symbol random value, and each variable pattern random value are extracted as the starting memory information, respectively. The numerical value is stored in the RAM 111C as a first start memory and a second start memory. Then, the number of stored start memories is displayed on the special figure 1 hold display 53 and the special figure 2 hold display 54 for notifying the start winning number of the batch display device 50, and is displayed on the display device 41 of the center case 40. Also displayed as a decorative special figure start memory display.

The game control device 100 plays a special figure 1 variation display game on the special figure 1 display 51 (first variation display device) based on the first start memory, and the special figure 2 display 52 (1st variation display device) is based on the second start memory. The special figure 2 variable display game is played on the second variable display device). Then, when both the first start memory and the second start memory are stored, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed with priority over the special figure 1 variable display game.

That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 is based on the first start memory stored according to the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening 36 (first start winning area), and the special figure 1 variable display game ( The execution control of the first special figure variation display game) is performed, and the special figure 2 variation is based on the second start memory stored according to the winning of the game ball to the normal variation winning device 37 (second start winning area). It serves as an execution control means for controlling the execution of the display game (second special figure variation display game). Then, the execution control means transfers the special figure 2 variable display game based on the second start memory from the special figure 1 variable display game based on the first start memory in a state where the first start memory and the second start memory are stored. Is also configured to be executed with priority.

In the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, after performing the variable display, a predetermined result mode is stopped and displayed. When the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 becomes a special result mode (big hit result mode) corresponding to the first special result. It becomes a big hit and becomes the first special game state (so-called big hit state).
Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 corresponds to the second special result (small hit result mode). Then, it becomes a small hit and becomes a second special game state (so-called small hit state). That is, special figure 1
The display 51 serves as a first variable display means capable of displaying the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36. Further, the special figure 2 display 52 serves as a second variable display means capable of displaying the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37.

Further, the game control device (game control means) 100 is in a jackpot game state (first special game state).
After the end of, control to generate a game state (specific game state) in which the game can proceed in a situation that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state (the probability of hitting is high and there is a general electric support). It is possible to do. That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 forms the specific game state generating means.

In addition, the display device 41 corresponds to the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game.
A decorative special figure variable display game that variablely displays a plurality of types of decorative identification information (numbers, symbols, character symbols, etc.) is being executed. The decorative special figure variable display game on the display device 41 includes a decorative special figure 1 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game and a decorative special figure 2 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game. Yes, these are displayed in separate display areas. Then, the variation display is performed according to the variation of the corresponding special figure variation display game, and the display corresponding to the result is performed according to the derivation of the result mode in the corresponding special figure variation display game.

That is, the display device 41 changes the decoration identification information in accordance with the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) and the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game). It serves as a decorative variation display means that can display a decorative special figure variation display game). It should be noted that different display devices may be used for the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game, or only one of the decorative special figure variable display games may be displayed. In addition, game machine 1
The special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41 without providing the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 at 0.

Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the game control device 10
The control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of 0 will be described. The control process by the game microcomputer 111 mainly includes the main process shown in FIGS. 7 and 8 and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 9 performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 ms).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, first, the process of disabling interrupts (step X1) is performed, and then the start address of the area for saving the value of the register or the like when an interrupt occurs is used. The stack pointer setting process (step X2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, register bank 0 is specified (step X3), and a predetermined register (step X3) is specified.
For example, the upper address of the RAM start address is set in the D register) (step X4).
.. In the case of the present embodiment, the range of the RAM address is 0000h to 01FFh, 00h or 01h is taken as the upper rank, and the first 00h is set in step X4. Next, the launch stop signal is output and the launch permission signal is set to the prohibited state (step X5). The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a launch stop signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited.

After that, the states of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 152 are read (step X6), and a process of setting the power-on delay timer (step X7) is performed. In the process of step X7, the game control device 1 serving as the main control means by setting a predetermined initial value.
Waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for a program of a slave control means (for example, payout control device 200 or effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to instructions from 00 to start normally
Is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up first and sends a command to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device Can avoid missing commands. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the start of the slave control devices (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It serves as a waiting means for setting the waiting time.

Further, the power-on delay timer is timed by using a storage area (a RAM area or a register that is not subject to the validity judgment) that is not subject to the validity judgment (checksum calculation) of the RAM. As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of a RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area for calculation, so that it is possible to prevent the control at the time of power-on from becoming complicated.

After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step X7), it is determined whether a power failure has occurred (step X8), and if a power failure has occurred (step X8; Y), the power of the gaming machine is supplied. Wait for it to be blocked.
Specifically, in step X8, for example, the number of times (for example, twice) that the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read and checked via the port and the data bus is set, and the power failure monitoring signal is turned on. Determine if there is any. Then, when the power failure monitoring signal is on, it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the set number of checks. Then, if the power failure monitoring signal has not been turned on for the number of checks, the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. If the power failure monitoring signal continues to be on for the number of checks, it is determined that a power failure has occurred. The same applies to steps X34 and X54 described later. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent false detection of a power failure due to noise or the like, and appropriately deal with problems when the power is turned on. can do.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to deal with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power cutoff are retained, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, when a power failure has not occurred (step X8; N), the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step X9), and it is determined whether the timer value is 0 (step X10).
If the value of the timer is not 0 (step X10; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of determining whether a power failure has occurred (step X8). Further, when the value of the timer is 0 (step X10; Y), that is, when the waiting time ends,
Permission is given to RWM (read / write memory) that can be read and written to RAM, EEPROM, etc. (step X11), and off-data is output to all output ports (set to a state where there is no output) (step X12).

Next, a serial port (a port previously mounted on the game microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in the present embodiment) is set (step X13), and the game microcomputer. A process (step X14) for activating a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator is a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and the CPU 1 based on the divided signal.
The 11A is provided with a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) and a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that triggers a random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.
Next, the RAM error flag is set (step X15). Here, on the premise that there is an abnormality in the RAM regardless of whether or not there is an abnormality in the RAM, the RAM abnormality flag is temporarily set in a predetermined register.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step X16), and if it is normal (step X16; Y),
Power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) in which the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal.
(Step X17). Then, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step X17; Y), the checksum calculation process (step X18) for calculating the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM is performed, and the calculated checksum and the power are turned off. It is determined whether the checksums of are matched (step X19). If the checksums match (step X19; Y)
Since there is no abnormality in the RAM, the RAM abnormality flag is cleared (step X20), and the process proceeds to step X21.

If it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step X16; N or step X17; N), and if it is determined that the checksums do not match (step X19; N), the step. Based on the state read by X6, it is determined whether both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are in the ON state (step X21). Then, when at least one of the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the off state (step X21; N), it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X22). When the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X22; Y), since there is an abnormality in the RAM, the effect control board (effect control) issues a main abnormality error notification command for notifying that the game control device 100 is abnormal. It is transmitted to the device 300) (step X24).

On the other hand, when the RAM abnormality flag is not set (step X22; N), it is determined whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set (step X23). Then, when the probability setting changing flag is set (step X23; Y), the main abnormality error notification command is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X24). The probability setting flag set here is the probability setting flag set before the occurrence of a power failure. That is, if the power of the game machine is cut off and restarted while the probability setting value is being changed,
Since the operation of the game control device 100 is stopped, the process of step X24 is performed.
Next, the 7-segment display data when the game is stopped is output to the fifth driver 138e via the second output port 134 (step X25). After that, the on-data of the security signal is output and the off-data of the signal other than the security signal is output (step X26).
, Return to step X25.

Further, when both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are in the ON state (step X21; Y), it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X27). Then, when the RAM error flag is not set (step X27).
; N) is set to the probability setting changing flag (step X29). As a result, the mode shifts to the probability setting value change mode. After that, the command for which the probability setting is being changed is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X30), and the process proceeds to step X31. Based on receiving the command during the probability setting change, the effect control device 300 displays the display device 41, emits light from the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, operates the board effect device 44, and the speaker 1.
Notification indicating that the probability setting value is being changed is performed by outputting voice by 9a and 19b.
On the other hand, when the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X27; Y), the process of clearing the probability set value (step X28) is performed. As a result, 0 is set in the area for the probability setting value in the RWM, and the probability setting value becomes “setting 1”. Then step X29,
The process of X30 is performed, and the process proceeds to step X31.

Further, when at least one of the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the off state (step X21; N), and neither the RAM abnormality flag nor the probability setting changing flag is set (Tep X22; N and step X23). In N), it is determined whether the setting key switch 152 is in the ON state based on the state read in step X6 (step X35). Then, when the setting key switch 152 is not in the ON state (step X35; N).
), It is determined whether the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the ON state based on the state read in step X6 (step X43).

When it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is not in the ON state (step X43; N)
That is, when both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are in the off state, the process proceeds to step X41 to perform the process when the power failure is normally restored.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the ON state (step X43).
In Y), the process proceeds to step X44 to perform initialization processing. That is, the RAM initialization switch 112 serves as an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make a means of conversion.

When the setting key switch 152 is in the ON state (step X35; Y), the probability setting checking flag is set (step X36). As a result, the mode shifts to the probability setting value confirmation mode. After that, the command during the probability setting confirmation is issued to the effect control board (effect control device 300).
(Step X37). In the effect control device 300, based on receiving the command during the probability setting confirmation, the display of the display device 41, the LED of the frame decoration device 18 and the panel decoration device 46
Due to the light emission, the operation of the board effect device 44, the output of sound by the speakers 19a and 19b, etc.
Notifies that the probability set value is being confirmed.

Then, in order to guarantee the output of the security signal for 50 msec or longer, the value corresponding to 128 msec is saved in the security signal control timer area (step X31). The security signal is output in the probability setting change / confirmation process (step X122) of the timer interrupt process in the probability setting value change mode or the probability set value confirmation mode, and in other cases, the external information editing of the timer interrupt process is edited. It is output in the process (step X120). Therefore, 12
When the probability set value change mode or the probability set value confirmation mode ends in less than 8 msec, the security signal is continuously output by the external information editing process (step X120) of the timer interrupt process. That is, even if the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode ends in less than 128 msec, the security signal is output for 128 msec after shifting to the probability set value change mode or the probability set value confirmation mode. To. The value saved in the security signal control timer area in step X31 is not limited to the value corresponding to 128 ms. However, at least 5 after shifting to the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode.
Since it is necessary to output a security signal for 0 msec, it is necessary to save the value corresponding to 50 msec or more.

Then, the interrupt is permitted (step X32), and it is determined whether the setting key switch 152 is in the off state (step X33). In step X33, the determination is not made based on the state read in step X6 (state at power-on), but the state read in the input process (step X103) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) (current state). Judge based on. When it is determined in step X33 that the setting key switch 152 is in the off state, the probability setting value is determined.
When the setting key switch 152 is not in the off state (step X33; N), it is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred (step X34), and when no power failure has occurred (step X34;
In N), the process returns to step X33, and if a power failure occurs (step X34; Y), the process proceeds to step X55. When it is determined in step X34 that a power failure has occurred while the probability setting changing flag is set, in step X23 of the main process (FIGS. 7 and 8) after the power failure is restored. It is determined that the probability setting changing flag is set.

On the other hand, when the setting key switch 152 is in the off state (step X33; Y), a process for disabling interrupts (step X38) is performed. Processing to allow interrupts (step X32)
) To the process of disabling interrupts (steps X38 and X55), the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 ms). In the timer interrupt process, the probability setting change / confirmation process (step X122), which is a process related to the probability set value.
Is done. That is, the main process is on standby until the change or confirmation of the probability set value is completed (or until a power failure occurs).
Next, a command to end the notification is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X39). The effect control device 300 receives a command to end the notification, and is based on receiving the command to end the notification.
The execution notification (notification indicating that the probability setting value is being changed or notification indicating that the probability setting value is being confirmed) is terminated.

Next, it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag is set (step X40), and when the probability setting changing flag is not set (step X40; N), that is, when the probability setting checking flag is set. Is the area to be initialized (eg, power outage inspection area,
The power failure recovery process (step X41) is performed to save the initial value at the time of power failure recovery in the checksum area and the area related to error fraud monitoring. The probability setting checking flag is cleared in this step X41.
After that, the command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the special figure game processing number is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X42), and the process proceeds to step X47. In the case of the present embodiment, in step X42, a plurality of model designation commands, probability setting information commands, special figure 1 hold number commands, special figure 2 hold number commands, probability information commands, effect count information commands, screen designation commands, and the like. Send a command. As the screen designation command, if both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are in the normal processing described later, that is, if the special figure variation display game is not being executed and the special game state is not in progress, the command is waiting for a customer. Send the command of the customer waiting demo screen, otherwise send the command of the recovery screen. Depending on the model, in addition to these commands, a high-probability number information command or the like is also transmitted.

On the other hand, when the probability setting changing flag is set (step X40; Y), the RAM area other than the probability setting value is cleared to 0 (step X44). In step X44, the RAM area for the probability set value (work area (1 byte area of the probability set value)) and the RAM area for performance display (display of base value and accessory ratio) (work area and stack area) are cleared. Instead, the game control RAM area (work area and stack area) is cleared to 0. Therefore, the probability setting changing flag is cleared in this step X44. In step X44,
You may or may not clear the stack area or unused area.

Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step X45).
.. The area to be initialized here is a customer waiting demo area and an area related to the setting of the production mode. Then, the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X46). In the case of this embodiment, in step X46, a model designation command, a probability setting information command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, an effect number information command, and a RAM initialization command (waiting for customers). Along with displaying the demo screen, a plurality of commands such as a command for notifying RAM initialization by light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) are transmitted. Also, depending on the model, in addition to these commands,
It also sends a command for the number of times of production, a command for the number of times of support, which is information on the number of times the special figure variation display game with Fukuden support is executed.

Next, a process of starting and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step X47). Specifically, the CPU 111A sets a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. In addition, the bit transposition pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set. The bit transposition pattern is a method of exchanging the extracted random number bits (arrangement before the upper bit transposition) in a predetermined order and storing them as different bit arrangements (arrangement after the lower bit transposition). It is a pattern that determines. By exchanging the bits of the random number according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. In addition, the user may be able to set it arbitrarily.

After that, a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on.
Various initial value random numbers (in the case of this embodiment, random numbers that determine the hit symbol of the special figure (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number), random number that determines the hit of the normal figure (win random number) )) Is saved in a predetermined area of the RWM as the initial value (start value) (step X48), and then interrupts are permitted (step X49). In the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the present embodiment, the initial value of the soft random number register is configured to change each time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to acquire an illegal random number.

Subsequently, the initial value random number update process (step X50) for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers is performed. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, and the hit random number are configured to be generated by using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. ing. However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock whose speed is equal to or higher than the operating clock of the CPU, and the jackpot symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, and the hit random number are timers that are processing units of the program. It is a "low-speed counter" that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing) that has the same cycle as the interrupt processing. In addition, for big hit symbol random numbers, small hit symbol random numbers, and hit random numbers, a so-called "initial value change method" is adopted in which the start value is changed using each initial value random number (generated by software) each time the random number makes a round. ing. It should be noted that each of the random numbers may be a counter-type update by +1 or -1, or a random-type update in which all the values in the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle is completed. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number updated only by the hardware, and the jackpot symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, and the hit random number are random numbers updated by the hardware and software.
In this embodiment, since a random number (hit symbol random number) for determining the hit symbol of the normal figure is not provided, there is only one type of hit symbol of the normal figure, but a hit symbol random number is provided and the hit symbol of the normal figure is provided. May be selected from a plurality of types.

After the initial value random number update process in step X50, a process for disabling interrupts (step X51)
Is performed, and the performance display editing process (step X52) is performed. Then, after performing the process of permitting the interrupt (step X53), it is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred (step X54), and if no power failure has occurred (step X54; N), the initial value random number update process is performed. (Step X5
Return to 0). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update process, the performance display editing process, and the power failure monitoring are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step X50) (step X49), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process will be executed with priority, and the timer interrupt will be executed. It is possible to prevent the interrupt processing from being overwhelmed by waiting for the initial value random number update processing.

In the initial value random number update process in step X50, in addition to the main process, there is also a method of performing the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process, and when such a method is adopted, the initial value in both of them. In order to avoid executing the random number update process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update to cancel the interrupt when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process.
If the initial value random number update process is not performed in the timer interrupt process as in the present embodiment and only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. This has the advantage of simplifying the main process.

On the other hand, when a power failure occurs (step X54; Y), a process of temporarily disabling interrupts (step X55) and a process of outputting off-data to all output ports (step X56) are performed.
After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step X57).
), The power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step X58).
Further, after performing a checksum calculation process (step X59) for calculating the checksum when the power of the RWM is turned off and a process (step X60) for saving the calculated checksum, the RW
After performing the process of prohibiting access to M (step X61), it waits for the power of the gaming machine to be cut off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is turned off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power is cut off is correctly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

From the above, a main control means (game control device 100) that comprehensively controls the game and a sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) that perform various controls according to instructions from the main control means, etc. ), The main control means is a standby means (game control device) that delays the activation of the main control means and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting for the activation of the slave control device when the power is turned on. 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined standby time are provided.
Further, a power supply device 400 for supplying electric power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) is , It is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) includes a RAM 111C capable of storing data and a RAM 111C.
An initialization operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112) that can be operated from the outside, and an initialization means that initializes the data stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation of the initialization operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112).
The game control device 100) is provided, and the operating state of the initialization means is read before the start of the waiting time.
Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is configured to allow access to the RAM 111C after the standby time has elapsed.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111A. That is, it is an interrupt routine that is started in a predetermined cycle. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process of FIG. 9 is started.

When the timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is specified (step X1).
01). By switching to the register bank 1, it is equivalent to performing a register save process of transferring the value held in a predetermined register (for example, the register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, the D register) (step X102). In step X102, the same processing as in step X4 in the main processing is performed, but the register banks are different. Next, input from various sensors and switches and signal acquisition, that is, input processing (step X103) for reading the state of each input port is performed.

Next, it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag or the probability setting checking flag is set (step X104), and when the probability setting changing flag or the probability setting checking flag is set (step X104; Y). , Probability setting change / confirmation process (step X122)
To end the timer interrupt processing.
On the other hand, when both the probability setting changing flag and the probability setting checking flag are not set (step X104; N), the solenoids (large winning opening solenoids 38b, 39b) are based on the output data set in various processes. , Lever solenoid 38f, Fuden solenoid 37
Output processing (step X105) for performing drive control of the actuator such as c) is performed. When the firing stop signal is output in step X5 in the main processing, the firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permitted state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, the signal is not processed. Further, the launch permission signal is the first signal indicating the launch permission status as seen from the game control device, and the second signal (launch permission signal) indicating the launch permission status as seen from the payout control device is also payout control. It is generated in the device and output to the launch control device. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the game ball is configured to be ready for launch.

Next, the payout command transmission process (step X106), the random number update process 1 (step X107), in which the commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes are output to the payout control device 200.
Random number update process 2 (step X108) is performed. After that, monitoring whether there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, and the large winning port switches 38a, 39a, setting the prize ball, the front frame and the glass The winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step X109) for opening the frame and monitoring errors such as illegal winning of the normal variable winning device 37 and the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not abnormal discharge is occurring (step X110). Abnormal discharge means that the number of game balls discharged from the first special variable winning device 38 (the number of game balls detected by the specific area switch 38d and the remaining ball discharge port switch 38e) in the first special variable winning device 38 is The number of game balls that have flowed into the first special variable winning device 38 (the number of game balls detected by the large winning opening switch 38a) is exceeded. If an abnormal discharge is occurring, the abnormal discharge flag is set. Then, when an abnormal discharge is occurring (step X110; Y), the process proceeds to step X116. That is, the game is prevented from progressing.

On the other hand, when the abnormal discharge is not occurring (step X110; N), the special figure game process (step X112) for processing the special figure variation display game and the normal figure game process (step) for performing the process related to the normal figure variation display game. X114) is performed, and a segment LED editing process (step X115) is performed, which is provided in the game machine 10 and drives the segment LED for displaying the display of the special figure variation display game and various information related to the game so as to display desired contents. Do.

Next, a magnet fraud monitoring process (step X116) that checks the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61 and determines whether or not there is an abnormality, and a process that checks the detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62 and determines whether or not there is an abnormality. Radio fraud monitoring process (step X117), vibration fraud monitoring process (step X118) that checks the detection signal from the vibration sensor 65 to determine if there is any abnormality, and determines whether abnormal discharge has occurred. Perform the abnormal discharge monitoring process (step X119). Further, external information editing processing (step X120) for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer and performance display monitor control processing (step X121) for controlling the performance display monitor 153 are performed to end the timer interrupt processing. To do.

Here, in the present embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting interrupts) and the process of restoring the register bank designation (that is, the process of specifying register bank 0) are interrupt return processes. It is automatically performed at the time (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Depending on the CPU used, some gaming machines need to be instructed to execute a process for restoring the interrupt disabled state or a process for restoring the register bank designation.

[Special game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure game processing (step X112) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing will be described. In the special figure game processing, the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 3
Monitor the input of 7a, control the entire process related to the special figure variation display game, and set the special figure display.

As shown in FIG. 10, in the special figure game process, first, a start port switch monitoring process (step A1) for monitoring the winning of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is performed. In the start port switch monitoring process, the start winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 3 forming the second starting winning opening 3
If there is a prize in the game ball in 7, various random numbers (big hit random numbers, etc.) are extracted, and the game result based on the prize is determined in advance before the start of the special figure variation display game based on the prize. Make a judgment.

Next, the large winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In this large winning opening switch monitoring process, monitoring of detection of a game ball by the upper special winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and lower in the second special variable winning device 39 are provided. Grand prize opening switch 39a
Performs a process of monitoring the detection of a game ball in. Then, a specific area switch monitoring process for monitoring the detection of the game ball in the specific area 38h is performed (step A3).

Next, if the special figure game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step A4). The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A5). The value of the special figure game processing timer is "
When it is "0" (step A5; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up, the special figure game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is registered. (Step A6), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the table (step A7).
Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure game processing number (step A8).

In step A8, when the special figure game processing number is "0", the change start of the special figure change display game is monitored, the change start setting and effect setting of the special figure change display game, and the special figure change is in progress. Special figure for setting information necessary for processing, etc. Ordinary processing (step A9) is performed.
In step A8, when the special figure game processing number is "1", the special figure changing process for setting the stop display time of the special figure, setting the information necessary for performing the special figure display processing, and the like. (Step A
10) is performed.

In step A8, when the special figure game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the fanfare command is set according to the type of big hit, and the big winning opening of each big hit. Special figure display processing (step A11) that sets the fanfare time according to the opening pattern, sets the information necessary for performing fanfare / interval processing, and so on.
)I do.

In step A8, when the special figure game processing number is "3", the opening time of the large winning opening is set, the number of opening times is updated, and the information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the large winning opening is set. Perform fanfare / interval processing (step A12).
In step A8, when the special figure game processing number is "4", the process of setting the interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, while setting the ending command if it is the final round, or the remaining big winning opening. The large winning opening opening processing (step A13) for setting the information necessary for performing the ball processing is performed.

In step A8, when the special figure game processing number is "5", if the jackpot round is the final round, the process of setting the time for the remaining balls in the jackpot to be discharged and the jackpot end process are performed. Large winning opening residual ball processing (step A14) for setting information necessary for the game
I do.
In step A8, when the special figure game processing number is "6", the jackpot end process (step A15) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure normal processing is performed.

In step A8, when the special figure game processing number is "7", in order to set the opening time / opening pattern of the big winning opening when a small hit occurs, set the fanfare command, and perform the small hit middle processing. The small hit fanfare middle process (step A16) for setting necessary information and the like is performed.
In step A8, when the special figure game processing number is "8", the small hit middle processing (step A) for setting the ending command, setting the information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball processing, and the like.
17) is performed.
In step A8, when the special figure game processing number is "9", a process of setting a time for the remaining balls that have won in the large winning opening during the small hit medium process to be discharged, or a small hit end process. The small hit remaining sphere processing (step A18) for setting the information necessary for performing the above is performed.
In step A8, when the special figure game processing number is "10", the small hit end process (step A19) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure normal processing is performed.

After that, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 (step A).
20), the symbol variation control process (step A21) related to the control of the variation of the special symbol by the special diagram 1 display 51 is performed. Then, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 (step A22), the symbol fluctuation control process (step A23) related to the control of the fluctuation of the special symbol by the special figure 2 display 52 is performed. .. After that, the lever solenoid control process (step A24) for controlling the operation of the lever solenoid 38f is performed to end the special figure game process. On the other hand, in step A5, when the value of the special figure game processing timer is not "0" (step A5;
N), that is, when the time is not up, the process proceeds to the process of step A20, and the subsequent processes are performed.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the start port switch monitoring process (step A1) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 11, in the start port switch monitoring process, first, the first start port (starting winning opening 36) winning monitoring table is prepared (step A101), and the hard random number acquisition process (step A102) is performed to perform the first step. 1 It is determined whether or not there is a prize in the starting port (step A103).
When it is determined in step A103 that there is no winning in the first starting port (step A103).
In N), the process proceeds to the process of step A109, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A103 that there is a prize in the first starting port (step A).
In 103; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure time is being shortened (during normal power support) (step A).
104).

If it is determined in step A104 that the special figure time is not shortened (step A104; N), the process proceeds to step A107, and subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, in step A104, when it is determined that the special figure time is being shortened (step A104;
In Y), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and an effect command setting process (step A106) for transmitting the command to the effect control device 300 is performed. That is, in the time saving state, the right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105) and the effect command setting process (step A106) is performed regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game. In the case of the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) is not won unless it is left-handed, and the normal variable winning device 37 is not won unless it is right-handed. Therefore, in the time-saving state, right-handed is more advantageous than left-handed, but when there is a prize in the first starting port during the time-saving state (that is, when left-handed during the time-saving state). Is configured to transmit a right-handed instruction notification command to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 issues a notification (warning) instructing the player to strike right.
Next, after preparing a table for setting the information of holding by the first starting port (starting winning opening 36) (step A107), the special figure starting port switch common process (step A108) is performed.

Next, the second starting port (normal variable winning device 37) winning monitoring table is prepared (step A1).
09), the hard random number acquisition process (step A110) is performed to determine whether or not there is a prize in the second starting port (step A111).
When it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning in the second starting port (step A111).
; N) ends the start port switch monitoring process.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A111 that there is a prize in the second starting port (step A).
At 111; Y), an ordinary electric accessory (ordinary variable winning device 37) is in operation, that is,
When it is determined whether or not the normal variable winning device 37 is activated and the game ball is in the open state in which the winning ball can be won (step A112), and it is determined that the normal electric accessory is operating (step A112; Y). , The process proceeds to step A114, and the subsequent processes are performed. On the other hand, step A
If it is determined in 112 that the normal electric accessory is not in operation (step A112; N), it is determined whether or not the electric power fraud is occurring (step A113).

In the determination of whether or not a fraudulent occurrence is occurring, it is determined that fraudulent occurrence is occurring when the number of fraudulent winnings to the ordinary variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (for example, 5). In the normal variable winning device 37, the game ball cannot be won in the closed state, and the game ball can be won only in the open state. Therefore, if the game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some kind of abnormality or fraud has occurred.
If there is a winning game ball in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of illegal winnings.
Then, when the number of fraudulent winnings counted in this way is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of fraud occurrence determinations (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

In step A113, if it is determined that the electric power fraud has not occurred (step A113; N), after preparing a table for setting the information on hold by the second starting port (normal variable winning device 37) (step A114), the special feature. Figure Start port switch common processing (step A115) is performed,
The start port switch monitoring process is terminated. If it is determined in step A113 that an illegal electric power is being generated (step A113; Y), the start port switch monitoring process ends. That is, the second start memory is prevented from being generated any more.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
Next, the details of the special figure start port switch common process (steps A108 and A115) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process will be described. The special figure start port switch common process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are input.

As shown in FIG. 12, in the special figure start port switch common processing, first, the start port 1 switch 36
Of a and the start port 2 switch 37a, the number of times the start port signal is output, which is the number of times the information regarding the number of winnings to the start port switch to be monitored is output to the external management device of the game machine 10, is loaded (step). A131), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step A132), and it is determined whether the number of outputs overflows (step A133). When the number of outputs does not overflow (step A133; N), the updated value is saved in the start port signal output count area of the RWM (step A134), and the process proceeds to step A135. On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step A133; Y), the process proceeds to step A135. In the present embodiment, a value from "0" to "255" can be stored in the start port signal output frequency region. Then, when the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by +1 update, and it is configured to determine that the number of outputs overflows.

Next, among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, it is determined whether the number of special figure reservations (starting memory) of the update target corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored is less than the upper limit value (step A135). When the number of special figures to be updated is not less than the upper limit (step A135; N
) Ends the common processing for the special figure start port switch.

If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is less than the upper limit (step A135; Y), the number of special figure reservations to be updated (the number of special figure 1 hold or the number of special figure 2 hold) is updated by +1 ( Step A13
6), save the target start opening winning flag (step A137). Subsequently, the address of the start port switch to be monitored and the random number storage area corresponding to the number of reserved special figures is calculated (step A138), and the jackpot random number prepared in step A125 of the hard random number acquisition process is stored in the RWM jackpot random number. Save to the area (step A139).

Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the start port switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (step A).
140), save in the RWM jackpot symbol random number storage area (step A141).
Next, the small hit symbol random number is extracted, prepared (step A143), and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A144).

Next, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are saved in the corresponding fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the RWM (step A145), and the special figure reservation information determination process (step A146) is performed.
Next, the start port switch to be monitored and the decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure hold number are prepared (step A147), and the effect command setting process (step A148) is performed.
Special figure Start port switch common processing ends.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the detection of the game ball in the starting area of the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, and is the starting right to execute the variable display game. It serves as a start storage means for storing up to a predetermined number of memories. Further, the start storage means (game control device 100) uses various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening (starting winning opening 36) as the first starting memory up to a predetermined number. Various random value values that are memorized and extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening (normal variable winning device 37) are stored.
It is stored as a second start memory up to a predetermined number.

[Special figure reservation information judgment processing]
Next, the special figure hold information determination process (step A14) in the above-mentioned start port switch common process.
The details of 6) will be described. The special figure reservation information determination process is a look-ahead process for determining result-related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

As shown in FIG. 13, first, a jackpot determination process (step A154) for determining whether or not a jackpot is a jackpot is performed depending on whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value. Then, when the determination result is a big hit (step A155; Y), the big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target start port switch is set (step A156), and in step A140 of the special figure start port switch common process. The stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared jackpot symbol random number is acquired (step A157), and the process proceeds to step A164.

On the other hand, when the determination result is not a big hit (step A155; N), the small hit determination process (step A159) for determining whether or not the jackpot is a small hit is performed depending on whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the small hit determination value. Do. Then, when the determination result is not a small hit (step A160; N), the stop symbol information of the loss is set (step A163), and the process proceeds to the process of step A164.
On the other hand, when the determination result is a small hit (step A160; Y), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (step A161), and the small hit symbol prepared in step A143 of the special figure start port switch common process is set. Acquire the stop symbol information corresponding to the random number (step A1)
62), the process proceeds to step A164.

Then, a look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the target start port switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A164), and the effect command setting process is performed (step A165). Next, the special figure information setting process (step A166) for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed, and the variation pattern setting process for setting the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is performed (step). A167).

After that, a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step A168), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step A169), the special figure reservation information determination process is terminated. The special figure information setting process in step A166 and the variation pattern setting process in step A167 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure normal processing.

By the above processing, a look-ahead symbol command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the look-ahead target and a look-ahead variation pattern command including the information of the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are prepared. And transmitted to the effect control device 300. As a result, the judgment result (look-ahead result) of the result-related information (whether or not it is a big hit and the type of fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is controlled to be produced before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory. The device 300 can be notified, and in particular, the result-related information is given to the player before the start timing of the special figure variation display game by changing the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41. It becomes possible to notify.

That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as the start memory in the start winning prize storage means (game control device 100) before executing the variation display game based on the start memory (the game control device 100).
(For example, it is determined whether or not a special result is obtained). It should be noted that the time to determine the random number value stored in advance corresponding to the start memory is not only when the start memory occurs but also before the variable display game based on the start memory is played. Good.

[Special figure normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure normal processing (step A9) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 14, in the special figure normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 hold number (second start storage number) is “0” (step A301). When it is determined that the special figure 2 hold number is "0" (step A301; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 hold number (first start storage number) is "0" (step A305). Then, the number of reserved special figures 1 is "0" (step A3).
If it is determined as 05; Y), it is determined whether the customer waiting demo has already started (step A309).
If the customer waiting demo has not been started (step A309; N), the customer waiting demo flag area is set to the customer waiting demo flag area (step A310).

Subsequently, the customer waiting demo command is prepared (step A311), and the effect command setting process (step A312) is performed. Next, "0" related to the special figure normal processing is set as the processing number (step A313), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A314). Then, the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A315), and the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A316).
), Special figure Ends normal processing. That is, when the special figure variation display game can be started but the start condition is not satisfied, the customer waiting demo command that forms the standby information is output to the effect control device 300.
It means that it is sent to.
On the other hand, when the customer waiting demo has already started in step A309 (step A309;
Y) shifts to the process of step A313 without performing the process of steps A310 to A312.

Further, in step A301, when the number of reserved special figures 2 is not "0" (step A301;
N) prepares a decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number (step A302).
). Next, the effect command setting process (step A303) is performed, and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A303) is performed.
Step A304) is performed to end the special figure normal processing.
Further, in step A305, when the number of reserved special figures 1 is not "0" (step A305;
N) prepares a decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number (step A306).
). Next, the effect command setting process (step A307) is performed, and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A307) is performed.
Step A308) is performed to end the special figure normal processing.

In this way, by checking the number of special figures 2 held before checking the number of special figures 1 held, if the number of special figures 2 held is not "0", the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A304). Will be executed. That is, the second special figure variation display game is executed in preference to the first special figure variation display game. That is, when the game control device 100 has a second start memory in the second start storage means (game control device 100), the variation display game based on the second start memory is displayed as a variation display based on the first start memory. It is a priority control means that is executed with priority over the game.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step A308) in the above-mentioned special figure normal processing will be described. The special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure variation display game. As shown in FIG. 15A, first, the special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step A321).
The jackpot flag 1 for determining whether or not the first special figure variation display game is a big hit is set with the deviation information and the jackpot information, and whether or not the first special figure variation display game is a small hit is determined. The big hit flag 1 setting process (step A322) for setting the small hit flag and the small hit information is performed.

Next, the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information).
After performing 323), the special figure information setting process (step A324) for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is performed, and various various settings related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the first special figure fluctuation display game are performed. A special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referencing information is set, is prepared (step A325). After that, the variation pattern setting process (step A326) for setting the variation pattern, which is the variation mode in the first special figure variation display game, is performed, and the variation start information setting process for setting the variation start information of the first special figure variation display game is performed. (Step A327) is performed.

Next, "1" related to the special figure changing process is set as the process number (step A328).
, The processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A329).
Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A330), and the signal related to the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 (for example, the signal during the change of the special symbol 1 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A331). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A332), and the blinking control timer (special figure 1 display 5) is saved in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area.
Set the initial value (here, 100 ms) of the blinking cycle timer of 1 (step A33).
3). Next, the initial value (here, "0") is saved in the special figure 1 variation symbol number area (step A334), and the special figure 1 variation start process is completed.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step A304) in the above-mentioned special figure normal processing will be described. The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure variation display game, and the same process as the process in the special figure 1 variation start process shown in FIG. 15A is performed in the second start. It is intended for memory.

As shown in FIG. 15B, first, the special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step A341), and the second
In order to set the big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not the special figure variation display game is a big hit, and to set the miss information and the big hit information, and to determine whether or not the second special figure variation display game is a small hit. Big hit flag 2 setting process to set misalignment information and small hit information to the small hit flag of
Step A342) is performed.

Next, the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A) related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information).
After performing 343), the special figure information setting process (step A344) for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is performed, and various various settings related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the second special figure fluctuation display game are performed. A special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referencing information is set, is prepared (step A345). After that, the variation pattern setting process (step A346) for setting the variation pattern, which is the variation mode in the second special figure variation display game, is performed, and the variation start information setting process for setting the variation start information of the second special figure variation display game is performed. (Step A347) is performed.

Next, "1" related to the special figure changing process is set as the process number (step A348).
, The processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A349).
Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A350), and the signal related to the start of fluctuation of special figure 2 (for example, the signal during change of special symbol 2 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A351). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A352), and the blinking control timer (special figure 2 indicator 5) is saved in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area.
Set the initial value (here, 100 ms) of the blinking cycle timer of 2 (step A35).
3). Next, the initial value (here, "0") is saved in the special figure 2 variation symbol number area (step A354), and the special figure 2 variation start process is completed.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a special figure variation display game execution control means for executing the special figure variation display game based on the start memory stored in the start storage means. Further, the special figure variation display game execution control means executes the first special figure variation display game as the special figure variation display game based on the first start memory, and the second special figure variation display game as the special figure variation display game based on the second start memory. The figure variation display game will be executed.

Next, the control by the effect control device 300 will be described. The main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 performs the main process shown in FIG. 16 and the timer interrupt process (not shown).

[Main processing]
As shown in FIG. 16, in the main process, the process at the start of the program is first performed. In the process at the start of this program, interrupts are first disabled (step C1), and the CPU is initially set (step C2). Next, the initial setting of VDP 312 is performed (step C3) to allow interrupts (step C4). Next, the generation of display data is permitted (step C).
5), a random number seed is set (step C6), and the initial value at the time of power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power failure detection detected flag and the like are cleared.

After performing the processing at the start of the program in steps C1 to C7, the loop processing is performed as the main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, the WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, an input signal based on the operation of the effect button 25 and the cross key 29 (
The effect button input process (step C9) for creating input information from the rising edge) is performed. The input from the effect button 25 and the cross key 29 is read in the timer interrupt process, and in this effect button input process, when there is an input from the effect button 25 or the cross key 29, the effect content is changed. ..

Then, the setting of the changeable range such as the brightness and volume of the LED and the liquid crystal, and the LED by the player
The hall / player setting mode processing that accepts operations such as changing the brightness and volume of the liquid crystal and the liquid crystal is performed (step C10). Next, a random number update process (step C11) for updating a random number that determines the details of the variation mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is performed.

Next, a reception command check process (step C12) that analyzes commands from the game control device 100 and responds to them is performed, and an effect display editing process (step C13) that edits settings and drawing commands for controlling the progress of the effect is performed. ) To set the end of preparation for the drawing command (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated according to the contents to be drawn, and the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. 1/3
If the drawing data of the screen to be drawn within 0 seconds (about 33.3 msec) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

Then, it is determined whether or not it is the frame switching timing (step C15). In this embodiment, a V blank interrupt (1/6) is used to create a system cycle (1/30 second per frame).
When 0 seconds) is entered twice, it is determined that the frame switching timing is reached. The frame switching timing can be changed as appropriate. For example, the image may be updated (frame switching) in 1/60 seconds, or the image may be updated (frames) at a timing later than 1/60 seconds. (Switching) may be performed. If it is determined in step C15 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C15; N), the process of step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step C15 that it is the frame switching timing (step C15; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C16).

After that, a sound control process (step C17) that controls the output of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b), and a decoration control process that controls LEDs such as the panel decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18 (step). C18), a panel that performs a movable body control process (step C19) that controls the motor, solenoid, and reel 6 of the panel effect device 44, and controls the effect by the notification unit 72, the point notification unit 73, the cumulative value notification unit 74, and the like. The effect setting process (step C20) is performed, and the process returns to the process of clearing the WDT (step C8).

[Receive command check process]
FIG. 17 shows the received command check process in the above-mentioned main process. In this received command check process, first, the value of the command reception counter that counts how many commands are received in one frame (1/30 second) is loaded as the number of command receptions (1/30 second).
Step C201), it is determined whether or not the number of command receptions is 0 (step C202).
.. Then, when it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C202; N), the received command check process ends. If it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C202; Y), the contents of the command reception counter area are subtracted by the number of command receptions (step C203).

Then, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (step C204).
), The command read index is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C205), and it is determined whether or not the copy of the command corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (step C206).
As described above, in the present embodiment, the command is not analyzed directly in the received command buffer.
The contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (RAM area for analysis), and the command analysis work is performed in the command area. As a result, the command (data) is prepared in case the command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during the analysis of the command.
Can be moved to make space. In addition, command analysis can be performed collectively in units of one main process.

If it is determined in step C206 that the copy of the command for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C206; N), the process returns to step C204. If it is determined that the copying of the commands for the number of received commands has been completed (step C206; Y),
The contents of the command area are loaded (step C207), and the received command analysis process (step C208) is performed.

Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether or not the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (step C210). Then, when it is determined that the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C210; N),
The process returns to step C207. Further, when it is determined that the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of received commands is completed (step C210; Y), the received command check process is terminated. In this way, in the received command check process, the commands received in one frame (1/30 second) are collectively analyzed. In this embodiment, up to 32 commands can be saved.

[Received command analysis processing]
FIG. 18 shows a received command analysis process in the above-mentioned received command check process. In this received command analysis process, first, the upper byte of the command is separated as MODE and the lower byte is ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether or not MODE and ACT are in the normal range (step C232, step C233). ). MODE and A
When CT is determined to be in the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y)
To determine if the ACT for MODE is the correct combination (step C23).
4).

Further, when it is determined in step C232 and step C233 that MODE or ACT is not in the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or when it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is not the correct combination (step C232; N, step C233; N). C2
34; N) ends the received command analysis process.

When it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is the correct combination (
In step C234; Y), MODE determines whether or not it is within the range of variable commands (step C235). The variable command is a command that commands the variable pattern of the special figure. Then, when it is determined that MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235).
In Y), a variable command process (step C236) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

Further, in step C235, when it is determined that MODE is not within the range of the variable command (
In step C235; N), MODE determines whether or not it is within the range of jackpot commands (step C237). The jackpot command is a command for commanding an operation related to a big hit medium effect (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen, etc.) or a command for an operation related to a small hit medium effect (display of a fanfare screen, an end screen, etc.). And MO
When it is determined that the DE is within the range of the jackpot command (step C237; Y), the jackpot command process (step C238) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

Further, in step C237, when it is determined that MODE is not in the range of the jackpot command (step C237; N), MODE determines whether or not it is in the range of the symbol command (step C239). The symbol system command is a command for commanding information about the symbol of the special symbol (for example, what the stop symbol of the special symbol should be). Then, when it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the symbol-based command (step C239; Y), the symbol-based command processing (step C239; Y) is performed.
Step C240) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

Further, in step C239, when it is determined that MODE is not within the range of the symbol command (
In step C239; N), MODE determines whether or not it is within the range of one-shot commands such as a hold number command and an error command (step C241). Single-shot commands are commands that are established independently, unlike commands that make sense in combination, such as symbol commands and variable commands. This one-shot command includes a customer waiting demo command, a hold count command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error / invalid command, a model specification command, and the like. Then, when it is determined that MODE is within the range of one-shot commands (step C24).
In 1; Y), a one-shot command process (step C242) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

Further, when it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not within the range of one-shot commands (
In step C241; N), MODE determines whether or not it is within the range of the look-ahead symbol command (step C243). Then, when it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the look-ahead symbol-based command (step C243; Y), the look-ahead symbol-based command processing (step C2)
44) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not in the range of the look-ahead symbol command (step C243; N), MODE determines whether or not it is in the range of the look-ahead variable command (step C245). When the MODE determines that the command is within the range of the look-ahead variable command (step C245; Y), the look-ahead variable command process (step C246) is performed to end the received command analysis process. Also, in step C245,
When it is determined that MODE is not within the range of the look-ahead variable command (step C245; N)
Ends the received command analysis process.

The look-ahead variable command and the look-ahead symbol command are commands that include information necessary for executing the look-ahead effect. The look-ahead effect (also called look-ahead notice or look-ahead notice effect) is whether or not the special figure change display game corresponding to the unexecuted start memory (hold) becomes a big hit when the special figure change display game is subsequently executed. In order to notify the player in advance of (or what kind of fluctuation pattern will be obtained) with a predetermined reliability, the decorative special figure start memory display or the like to be displayed on the display device 41 may be performed in a mode different from the usual mode, or the display device 41 may be displayed. It is a production such as performing a production display on. The look-ahead command (look-ahead variable command and look-ahead symbol command) is a command that informs in advance the fluctuation pattern and the stop symbol corresponding to the start memory that is the target of the look-ahead effect, and is from the game control device 100 at the time of starting winning. It is transmitted to the effect control device 300. It should be noted that normal variable commands and symbol commands that are not look-ahead are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of the special figure variable display game.

[Special figure fluctuation display game and decoration special figure fluctuation display game]
The special figure variation display game in the batch display device 50 and the variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) in the display device 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 28.
For example, as shown in FIG. 19A, a first decoration game display unit 81 for displaying the first decoration game among the decoration special figure variation display games is provided in the center of the display area of the display device 41.
The first decorative game display unit 81 displays the decorative special figure variable display game by displaying the identification information in a variable manner in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas and then stopping and displaying the identification information.

At the lower right of the display area of the display device 41, a second decoration game display unit 82 for displaying the second decoration game among the decoration special figure variation display games is provided. The second decoration game displayed on the second decoration game display unit 82 has identification information in each area of the left area, the middle area, and the right area, similarly to the first decoration game displayed on the first decoration game display unit 81. After changing the display, stop and display the result. The second decorative game display unit 82 displays identification information (small symbol) that is relatively smaller than the identification information (large symbol) displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81.

Further, in the lower center of the display area of the display device 41, a standby storage display unit 83 for displaying the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory is provided.
The decorative special figure variable display game displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 is the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game (decorative special figure 1 variable display game). If this is the case, the standby storage display unit 83 displays a decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory (first start memory) that is the execution right of the special figure 1 variable display game. in this case,
The decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the standby memory display unit 83 has a one-to-one correspondence with the first start memory, and the leftmost decorative special figure start memory display corresponds to the first start memory stored first. It is displayed side by side in the order of memory so that it becomes a special figure start memory display, and it shifts to the left each time it is digested.

Further, the decorative special figure variable display game displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 corresponds to the special figure 2 variable display game (decorative special figure 2 variable display). In the case of a game), the standby storage display unit 83 displays a decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory (second start memory) that is the execution right of the special figure 2 variable display game. In this case, the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the standby storage display unit 83 has a one-to-one correspondence with the second start memory, and the leftmost decorative special figure start memory display is stored first in the second start. Ornamental special figure corresponding to memory It is displayed side by side in the order of memory so that it becomes a memory display, and it shifts to the left each time it is digested.
Further, the standby memory display unit 83 may suggest the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory and the look-ahead result such as the variation pattern by the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory. It is possible.

To the left of the standby storage display unit 83, an execution storage display unit 84 that displays information related to the start memory corresponding to the special figure variation display game currently being executed is provided. At the start of the special figure variation display game, the decorative special figure start storage display at the left end of the standby storage display unit 83 is transferred to the running memory display unit 84. Further, the running memory display unit 84 suggests the result and the fluctuation pattern of the special figure variation display game currently being executed by the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the running memory display unit 84. It is possible.
In the upper left portion of the display area of the display device 41, a first start memory number display unit 85a for displaying the first start memory number (special figure 1 hold number) and a second start memory number (special figure 2 hold number) are displayed. A second start storage number display unit 85b for displaying is provided.

19 and 20 show a case where the special figure 1 variable display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variable display game in which the result is a “big hit”. FIG. 19 is an example of display on the display device 41 and the batch display device 50, and FIG. 20 is an example of a timing chart.
In FIG. 19A, the first start memory number is 1 and the second start memory number is 0 during the stop display time of the special figure 1 variable display game in which the result is “missing”. Indicates the state. Here, since the game result is "missing", in the display device 41, the display mode of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 is one of the "missing" result modes. It is "123", and in the batch display device 50, the special figure 1 display 51
The display mode of is "off" (LED lamp A0 is turned on and LED lamp A
1 to A7 are turned off). Further, in the example shown in FIG. 19A, the display mode of the special figure 2 display 52 is also the result mode of “off” (LED lamp B0 is turned on and L).
The mode in which the ED lamps B1 to B7 are turned off).

Further, here, since the stop display time of the special figure 1 variation display game is in progress, the first start memory number is 1, and the second start memory number is 0, the display device 41 has the first The numerical value of the start storage number display unit 85a is "1", the numerical value of the second start storage number display unit 85b is "0", one is in the standby storage display unit 83, and one is in the running storage display unit 84. Displays 0 decorative special figure start memory displays (decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory). Further, in the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 hold display 53 corresponds to "one special figure hold" (the mode in which the LED lamp C0 is turned on and the LED lamp C1 is turned off (the mode in which the LED lamp C0 is turned on and the LED lamp C1 is turned off
(Refer to FIG. 4D)), and the display mode of the special figure 2 hold indicator 54 is “no special figure hold”.
(See the mode in which the LED lamps C2 and C3 are turned off (see FIG. 4D)).

Here, since the game result is "out of place", the first start memory number is 1, and the second start memory number is 0, the special figure variation display game and decoration are displayed when the stop display time ends. The special figure variation display game ends, and the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts. Special Figure 1 When the variable time of the variable display game starts, FIG. 19 (b)
), In the display device 41, the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 is displayed to be transferred to the execution memory display unit 84, and the first start memory number display is performed. The numerical value of the part 85a changes. Here, since the first start memory is digested and becomes 0, the decorative special figure start memory display (decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory) of the standby memory display unit 83 becomes 0. The numerical value of the first start storage number display unit 85a is "0". Further, in the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 hold display 53 is changed to correspond to the “no special figure hold” mode (LED lamps C0 and C1 are turned off (FIG. 4 (FIG. 4)). d) See)
).

Special Figure 1 When the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable time of the variable display game, the display device 41
In, the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game starts, and in the batch display device 50, the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game starts. Specifically, the variable display of the identification information (large symbol) starts in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas of the first decorative game display unit 81, and the left area of the second decorative game display unit 82, The variable display of the identification information (small symbol) starts in each of the middle area and the right area. Further, the special figure 1 display 51 indicates a fluctuation, that is, a mode corresponding to "changing" (a state in which the LED lamps A0, A2, A4, A6 are lit and a state in which the LED lamps A1, A3, A5, A7 are lit Alternately switching mode)
(See FIG. 4 (b)) starts. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the fluctuation time starts, the special figure fluctuation display game and the decorative special figure fluctuation display game start, but the fluctuation display does not start, and the first predetermined from the start of the fluctuation time. When the time has passed, the variable display of the special figure variable display game and the decorative special figure variable display game starts.

When the game ball wins a prize in the start winning opening 36 and the first start memory (first special figure hold) is generated during the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game, the display device 41 shows as shown in FIG. As the number of the decorative special figure start memory display of the standby storage display unit 83 changes, the numerical value of the first start memory number display unit 85a changes, and in the batch display device 50, the special figure 1 hold display 53 The display mode of is changed.

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t1).
1), as shown in FIGS. 19 (d) and 20, in the display device 41, the variable display is completed and the game result is displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82. At the same time, the decorative special figure start memory display (decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory) of the running memory display unit 84 disappears. Further, in the batch display device 50, the variation display is completed and the game result is displayed on the special figure 1 display 51. Here, since the game result is a "big hit", in the display device 41, the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 8
The display mode of 2 is "333", which is one of the result modes of "big hit".
In the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 is one of the result modes of "big hit".

Further, here, since the game result is a "big hit", the first start memory number is 1, and the second start memory number is 0, the special figure variation display game and decoration are displayed when the stop display time ends. The special figure variation display game ends and the first special game state starts (t12), and when the ending time of the jackpot ends, the first special game state ends and the next special figure variation display game is a special figure. 1 The variable time of the variable display game starts (t13). Special Figure 1 When the variable time of the variable display game starts, as shown in FIG. 19 (f), in the display device 41, the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby storage display unit 83 is the running memory display. Along with the display of shifting to the unit 84, the numerical value of the first start storage number display unit 85a changes, and in the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 hold display 53 changes.

In the present embodiment, the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 are hidden at the same time as the start of the special game state, and then the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 are hidden at the same time as the start of the variable time. 2 The decorative game display unit 82 reappears. That is, the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 become invisible at the same time as the start of the special game state, and become visible at the same time as the start of the fluctuation time. Then, the result of the previous special figure variation display game is first displayed on the reappearing first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82. Here, because the result of the previous special figure variation display game is "333" (Fig. 19 (Fig. 19).
d)), as shown in FIGS. 19 (e) and 20, “333” at the same time as the start of the fluctuation time.
The first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 appear in a state where is stopped and displayed (t13). Since the variable display of the decorative special figure variation display game is started when the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable time, the period from the start of the variable time to the elapse of the first predetermined time (t13 to t14). , The display mode of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 does not change, and the state in which "333" is stopped and displayed is maintained.

Further, the display modes of the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50 are the same as those before the start of the special game state even during the special game state (see FIG. 19 (d)). Is maintained at. Then, since the variation display of the special figure variation display game is also started when the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation time, as shown in FIG. 20, the decorative special figure variation display game starts from the start of the stop display time. The display modes of the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 do not change until the start of the variable display (t11 to t14).

When the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation time (t14), as shown in FIG. 20, the first decorative game display unit 81 of the display device 41 initially displays a low speed fluctuation (variation display at an identifiable speed). ) Is performed, the fluctuation speed gradually increases during this low-speed fluctuation (t14 to t15), and then high-speed fluctuation (variation display at a speed that is difficult to identify) is performed as shown in FIG. 19 (f). t15 ~
t16). After that, as shown in FIG. 19 (g), the high-speed fluctuation ends and the low-speed fluctuation starts (t).
16), the fluctuation speed gradually decreases during this low-speed fluctuation (t16 to t17), and eventually a temporary stop state is reached (t17 to t19).

As shown in FIG. 19 (g), the identification information of the first decorative game display unit 81 starts low-speed fluctuation in the order of the left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area, and the left fluctuation display area. , The right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area are temporarily stopped in this order. In the temporarily stopped state, the identification information is displayed in a swaying manner, indicating that the information has not been completely stopped. As shown in FIG. 19 (h), if the same identification information is temporarily stopped in the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area, the reach state is reached and the reach fluctuation is started (t18).
In FIG. 20, for convenience, only the timing of the identification information to be displayed in the left variable display area is shown as the identification information (large symbol) of the first decorative game display unit 81. Therefore, in FIG. 20, “t14” is the timing at which the identification information (left symbol) displayed in the left fluctuation display area starts low-speed fluctuation, and the identification information (right symbol) displayed in the right fluctuation display area and the medium fluctuation display. The timing at which the identification information (middle symbol) displayed in the area starts low-speed fluctuation is between "t14" and "t15". Further, "t16" is the timing at which the left symbol ends the high-speed fluctuation (starts the low-speed fluctuation), and the timing at which the right symbol and the middle symbol end the high-speed fluctuation (starts the low-speed fluctuation) is "t16".
"And" t17 ". Further, "t17" is the timing when the left symbol starts the temporary stop, "t18" is the timing when the right symbol starts the temporary stop, and the timing when the middle symbol starts the temporary stop is "t18" and "t19". Is between.

On the other hand, in the second decorative game display unit 82 of the display device 41, high-speed fluctuation is performed from the beginning to the end. That is, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable time (t14 to t19), the display mode of the identification information (small symbol) of the second decorative game display unit 82 is maintained in the high-speed variable display mode. Further, in the batch display device 50, from the start of the fluctuation display to the end of the fluctuation time (t1).
4 to t19), the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 (here, the special figure 1 display 51) is maintained in a mode corresponding to “changing”.

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t1).
9), as shown in FIGS. 19 (i) and 20, in the display device 41, the variable display ends and the game result is displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82. At the same time, the decorative special figure start memory display (decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory) of the running memory display unit 84 disappears. Further, in the batch display device 50, the variation display is completed and the game result is displayed on the special figure 1 display 51. After that, the special figure variation display game and the decorative special figure variation display game end with the end of the stop display time. Here, since the game result is "out of place" and there is no start memory, the game shifts to the customer waiting state. If there is a start memory, the next special figure variation display game will start. If the result is a big hit, it is in the first special game state, and if it is a small hit, it is in the second special game state.

Of course, even when the game result is "hit", the game proceeds in the same manner as when the game result is "missing". That is, when the game result is "hit", only FIG. 19 (i) of FIGS. 19 (a) to 19 (i) is different. Specifically, the game result is "
In the case of "hit", in FIG. 19 (i), the display mode of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 is one of the result modes of "hit", and the special figure 1 The display mode of the display 51 is one of the “hit” result modes.

As shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, when the special figure 1 variable display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variable display game in which the result is a “big hit”, the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next is executed. At the start of (t13 to t14), the display modes of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 of the display device 41 are the result modes of the “big hit”, and the special figure 1 of the batch display device 50 The display mode of the display 51 is a result mode of "big hit".
Therefore, in this case, the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82
In a state where the stop symbol (big hit symbol) of is aligned with the stop symbol (big hit symbol) of the special figure 1 display 51, the variable display (special figure 1 display 51) of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next is executed. (Fluctuating display in) and the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next (variable display in the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82). Will be started.

Also, when the special figure 1 variable display game is executed after the special figure 1 variable display game whose result is "small hit", or when the special figure 1 variable display game whose result is "missing" is executed, special figure 1 Similarly, when the variable display game is executed, the stop symbol of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the stop symbol of the special figure 1 display 51 are aligned with each other, and then the next Special figure 1 to be executed
The variable display of the variable display game and the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next will be started.

That is, when the special figure 1 variable display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variable display game, the stop symbols of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the special figure 1 display 51
In the state where the stop symbol of is consistent, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game to be executed next and the fluctuation display of the game
The variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next is started.
Further, when the special figure 2 variable display game is executed next to the special figure 2 variable display game, the stop symbols of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the special figure 2 display are similarly executed. 52
In the state where the stop symbol of is consistent, the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game to be executed next and the fluctuation display of the game
The variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next will be started.

21 and 22 show a case where the special figure 2 variable display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variable display game in which the result is a “big hit”. FIG. 21 is an example of display on the display device 41 and the batch display device 50, and FIG. 22 is an example of a timing chart. 21 (a) and 21 (b) show
Since it is a diagram showing the same state as FIGS. 19A and 19B, the description thereof will be omitted.
Special Figure 1 When a game ball wins a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 and a second start memory (second special figure hold) occurs during execution of the variable display game, the display device 41 is shown in FIG. 21 (c). In, the numerical value of the second start storage number display unit 85b changes, and in the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 hold display 54 changes.

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t2).
1), as shown in FIGS. 21 (d) and 22, in the display device 41, the variable display is completed and the game result is displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82. At the same time, the decorative special figure start memory display (decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory) of the running memory display unit 84 disappears. Further, in the batch display device 50, the variation display is completed and the game result is displayed on the special figure 1 display 51. Here, since the game result is a "big hit", in the display device 41, the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 8
The display mode of 2 is "333", which is one of the result modes of "big hit".
In the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 is one of the result modes of "big hit".

Further, here, since the game result is "big hit", the first start memory number is 0, and the second start memory number is 1, when the stop display time ends, the special figure variation display game and decoration The special figure variation display game ends and the first special game state starts (t22), and when the ending time of the jackpot ends, the first special game state ends and the next special figure variation display game is a special figure. 2 The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display game starts (t23). Special Figure 2 When the fluctuation time of the variable display game starts, in the display device 41, as shown in FIG. 21 (e), the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the second start memory is displayed on the standby storage display unit 83. Displayed, then FIG. 21
As shown in (f), the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 is displayed to shift to the running memory display unit 84, and the numerical value of the second start memory number display unit 85b is displayed. Changes. Further, in the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 hold display 54 changes.

In the present embodiment, from the start of the fluctuation time to the start of the transition effect (the effect of shifting the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 to the running memory display unit 84). The time is when the special figure 1 variable display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variable display game (
19 (a), (b), 19 (e), (f), 21 (a), (b)) and special figure 2
When the special figure 2 variable display game is executed next to the variable display game, and when the special figure 2 variable display game is executed after the special figure 1 variable display game (see FIGS. 21 (e) and 21 (f)). , It is the same as the case where the special figure 1 variable display game is executed next to the special figure 2 variable display game. In the present embodiment, the time from the start of the variable time to the start of the transition effect is set to, for example, the second predetermined time shorter than the first predetermined time (the time from the start of the variable time to the start of the variable display).

Further, in the present embodiment, the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory has a circular shape, and the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the second start memory has a hexagonal shape. That is, in the present embodiment, the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory and the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the second start memory are different from each other, so that the decorative feature being displayed is displayed. Figure Notifies which of the first start memory and the second start memory the start memory display corresponds to. Of course, by changing the display mode (for example, color or size) other than the shape, it is notified whether the decorative special figure start memory display being displayed corresponds to the first start memory or the second start memory. You may try to do it.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 are hidden at the same time as the start of the special gaming state, and then the first decorative game is displayed at the same time as the start of the variable time. The display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 reappear. Then, the result of the previous special figure variation display game is first displayed on the reappearing first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82. Here, the result of the previous special figure fluctuation display game is "
Since it is "333" (see FIG. 21 (d)), as shown in FIGS. 21 (e) and 22, the first decorative game display unit 81 and the state in which "333" is stopped and displayed at the same time as the start of the fluctuation time Second
The decorative game display unit 82 appears (t23). Since the variable display of the decorative special figure variation display game is started when the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable time, the period from the start of the variable time to the elapse of the first predetermined time (t23 to t24). , 1st decoration game display 81 and 2nd
The display mode of the decorative game display unit 82 does not change, and the state in which "333" is stopped and displayed is maintained.

Further, the display modes of the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50 are the same as those before the start of the special game state even during the special game state (see FIG. 21 (d)). Is maintained at. Then, since the variation display of the special figure variation display game also starts when the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation time, as shown in FIG. 22, the decorative special figure variation display game starts from the start of the stop display time. The display modes of the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 do not change until the start of the variable display (t21 to t24).

When the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation time (t24), as shown in FIG. 22, the first decorative game display unit 81 of the display device 41 initially displays a low speed fluctuation (variation display at an identifiable speed). ) Is performed, the fluctuation speed gradually increases during this low-speed fluctuation (t24 to t25), and then high-speed fluctuation (variation display at a speed that is difficult to identify) is performed as shown in FIG. 21 (f). t25 ~
t26). After that, as shown in FIG. 21 (g), the high-speed fluctuation ends and the low-speed fluctuation starts (t).
26), the fluctuation speed gradually decreases during this low-speed fluctuation (t26 to t27), and eventually a temporary stop state is reached (t27 to t29). As shown in FIG. 21 (h), if the same identification information is temporarily stopped in the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area, the reach state is reached and the reach fluctuation is started (t28).
In FIG. 22, for convenience, only the timing of the identification information to be displayed in the left variable display area is shown as the identification information (large symbol) of the first decorative game display unit 81.

On the other hand, in the second decorative game display unit 82 of the display device 41, high-speed fluctuation is performed from the beginning to the end. That is, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable time (t24 to t29), the display mode of the identification information (small symbol) of the second decorative game display unit 82 is maintained in the high-speed variable display mode. Further, in the batch display device 50, from the start of the fluctuation display to the end of the fluctuation time (t2).
4 to t29), the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 (here, the special figure 2 display 52) is maintained in a mode corresponding to “changing”.

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t2).
9), as shown in FIGS. 21 (i) and 22, in the display device 41, the variable display is completed and the game result is displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82. At the same time, the decorative special figure start memory display (decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the second start memory) of the running memory display unit 84 disappears. Further, in the batch display device 50, the variation display is completed and the game result is displayed on the special figure 2 display 52. After that, the special figure variation display game and the decorative special figure variation display game end with the end of the stop display time. Here, since the game result is "out of place" and there is no start memory, the game shifts to the customer waiting state.

Of course, even when the game result is "hit", the game proceeds in the same manner as when the game result is "missing". That is, when the game result is "hit", only FIG. 21 (i) is different from FIGS. 21 (a) to 21 (i). Specifically, the game result is "
In the case of "hit", in FIG. 21 (i), the display mode of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 is one of the result modes of "hit". 2 The display mode of the display 52 is one of the “hit” result modes.

As shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, when the special figure 2 variable display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variable display game in which the result is a “big hit”, the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next is executed. At the start of (t23 to t24), the display modes of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 of the display device 41 are the result modes of "big hit". Further, at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game (t23 to t24) to be executed next, the special figure 2 of the batch display device 50
Since the result of the previous special figure 2 variable display game is displayed on the display 52, the previous special figure 2
When the result of the variable display game is "missing", as shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game (t23 to t24) to be executed next, the batch display device 50 The display mode of the special figure 2 display 52 of FIG. 2 is a result mode of “off”.

Therefore, there is a case where the result mode of "off" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50, and the special figure 2 is next to the special figure 1 variable display game in which the result is "big hit". When executing the variable display game, the stop symbol (big hit symbol) of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the stop symbol (missing symbol) of the special figure 2 display 52 are aligned. The variable display of the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next (variable display on the special figure 2 display 52) and the decorative special figure variable display corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next. The variable display of the game (variable display in the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82) will be started.

Further, in the case where the result mode of "off" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50, the special figure is next to the special figure 1 variable display game in which the result is "small hit". 2 Similarly, when executing the variable display game, the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 8
In a state where the stop symbol (small hit symbol) of 2 and the stop symbol (missing symbol) of the special figure 2 display 52 do not match, the variation display of the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next, and the next The variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed will be started.

That is, there is a case where the result mode of "missing" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50, and the special figure 2 is next to the special figure 1 variable display game in which the result is "hit". When executing the variable display game, the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82
In a state where the stop symbol (hit symbol) of the special figure 2 and the stop symbol (missing symbol) of the special figure 2 display 52 do not match, the variation display of the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next and the next execution Special figure 2
The variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the variable display game will be started.

In the case where the result mode of "missing" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50, the special figure 2 variable display is next to the special figure 1 variable display game in which the result is "hit". In order to start the variable display in a state where the stop symbols of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 2 display 52 are aligned when the game is executed. At the start of the special figure 2 variable display game (t23 to t24) to be executed next, the result mode of "off" is displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 (previous game). result(
It is necessary to display the "hit" result mode) and then the "miss" result mode, or to display the "miss" result mode without displaying the previous game result). There is. Alternatively, at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game (t23 to t24) to be executed next, it is necessary to display the result mode of "hit" on the special figure 2 display 52.

Then, the player may be given the illusion that the special figure variation display game has been executed even though the special figure start memory has not been digested. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even if the stop symbols of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 2 display 52 are inconsistent, they are inconsistent. Since the variable display of the special figure 2 variable display game and the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game is started, it is possible to avoid erroneous recognition of the game situation and the player It is possible to smoothly proceed with the variable display game without giving a sense of discomfort.

23 and 24 show a case where the special figure 1 variable display game is executed next to the special figure 2 variable display game in which the result is a “big hit”. FIG. 23 is an example of display on the display device 41 and the batch display device 50, and FIG. 24 is an example of a timing chart.
In FIG. 23A, the first start memory number is 0 and the second start memory number is 1 during the stop display time of the special figure 2 variable display game in which the result is “missing”. Indicates the state. Here, since the game result is "missing", in the display device 41, the display mode of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 is one of the "missing" result modes. It is "123", and in the batch display device 50, the special figure 2 display 52
The display mode of is the result mode of "off". Further, in the example shown in FIG. 23A, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 is also a result mode of “off”.

Here, since the game result is "off", the first start memory number is 0, and the second start memory number is 1, when the stop display time ends, the special figure variation display game and decoration The special figure variation display game ends, and the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts. Special Figure 2 When the fluctuation time of the variable display game starts, FIG. 23 (b)
), The display device 41 displays that the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 shifts to the running memory display unit 84, and also displays the second start memory number. The numerical value of the unit 85b changes, and in the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 hold display 54 changes.

Special Figure 2 When the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable time of the variable display game, the display device 41
In, the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game starts, and in the batch display device 50, the variable display of the special figure 2 variable display game starts.
When the game ball wins a prize in the start winning opening 36 and the first start memory (first special figure hold) occurs during the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game, the display device 41 shows as shown in FIG. 23 (c). Is the first
The numerical value of the start storage number display unit 85a changes, and in the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 hold display 53 changes.

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t3).
1), as shown in FIGS. 23 (d) and 24, in the display device 41, the variable display is completed and the game result is displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82. At the same time, the decorative special figure start memory display (decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the second start memory) of the running memory display unit 84 disappears. Further, in the batch display device 50, the variation display is completed and the game result is displayed on the special figure 2 display 52. Here, since the game result is a "big hit", in the display device 41, the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 8
The display mode of 2 is "333", which is one of the result modes of "big hit".
In the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 display 52 is one of the result modes of "big hit".

Further, here, since the game result is a "big hit", the first start memory number is 1, and the second start memory number is 0, the special figure variation display game and decoration are displayed when the stop display time ends. The special figure variation display game ends and the first special game state starts (t32), and when the ending time of the jackpot ends, the first special game state ends and the next special figure variation display game is a special figure. 1 The variable time of the variable display game starts (t33). When the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game starts, in the display device 41, as shown in FIG. 23 (e), the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory is displayed on the standby storage display unit 83. Displayed, then FIG. 23
As shown in (f), the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 is displayed to shift to the running memory display unit 84, and the numerical value of the first start memory number display unit 85a is displayed. Changes. Further, in the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 hold display 53 changes.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 are hidden at the same time as the start of the special gaming state, and then the first decorative game is displayed at the same time as the start of the variable time. The display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 reappear. Then, the result of the previous special figure variation display game is first displayed on the reappearing first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82. Here, the result of the previous special figure fluctuation display game is "
Since it is "333" (see FIG. 23 (d)), as shown in FIGS. 23 (e) and 24, the first decorative game display unit 81 and the state in which "333" is stopped and displayed at the same time as the start of the fluctuation time Second
The decorative game display unit 82 appears (t33). Since the variable display of the decorative special figure variation display game is started when the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable time, the period from the start of the variable time to the elapse of the first predetermined time (t33 to t34). , 1st decoration game display 81 and 2nd
The display mode of the decorative game display unit 82 does not change, and the state in which "333" is stopped and displayed is maintained.

Further, the display modes of the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50 are the same as those before the start of the special game state even during the special game state (see FIG. 23 (d)). Is maintained at. Then, since the variation display of the special figure variation display game also starts when the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation time, as shown in FIG. 24, the decorative special figure variation display game starts from the start of the stop display time. The display modes of the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 do not change until the start of the variable display (t31 to t34).

When the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation time (t34), as shown in FIG. 24, the first decorative game display unit 81 of the display device 41 initially displays a low speed fluctuation (variation display at an identifiable speed). ) Is performed, the fluctuation speed gradually increases during this low-speed fluctuation (t34 to t35), and then high-speed fluctuation (variation display at a speed that is difficult to identify) is performed as shown in FIG. 23 (f). t35-5
t36). After that, as shown in FIG. 23 (g), the high-speed fluctuation ends and the low-speed fluctuation starts (t).
36), the fluctuation speed gradually decreases during this low-speed fluctuation (t36 to t37), and eventually a temporary stop state is reached (t37 to t39). As shown in FIG. 23 (h), if the same identification information is temporarily stopped in the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area, the reach state is reached and the reach fluctuation is started (t38).
In FIG. 24, for convenience, only the timing of the identification information to be displayed in the left variable display area is shown as the identification information (large symbol) of the first decorative game display unit 81.

On the other hand, in the second decorative game display unit 82 of the display device 41, high-speed fluctuation is performed from the beginning to the end. That is, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable time (t34 to t39), the display mode of the identification information (small symbol) of the second decorative game display unit 82 is maintained in the high-speed variable display mode. Further, in the batch display device 50, from the start of the fluctuation display to the end of the fluctuation time (t3).
4 to t39), the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 (here, the special figure 1 display 51) is maintained in a mode corresponding to “changing”.

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t3).
9), as shown in FIGS. 23 (i) and 24, in the display device 41, the variable display is completed and the game result is displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82. At the same time, the decorative special figure start memory display (decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory) of the running memory display unit 84 disappears. Further, in the batch display device 50, the variation display is completed and the game result is displayed on the special figure 1 display 51. After that, the special figure variation display game and the decorative special figure variation display game end with the end of the stop display time. Here, since the game result is "out of place" and there is no start memory, the game shifts to the customer waiting state.

Of course, even when the game result is "hit", the game proceeds in the same manner as when the game result is "missing". That is, when the game result is "hit", only FIG. 23 (i) is different from FIGS. 23 (a) to 23 (i). Specifically, the game result is "
In the case of "hit", in FIG. 23 (i), the display mode of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 is one of the result modes of "hit", and the special figure 1 The display mode of the display 51 is one of the “hit” result modes.

As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, when the special figure 1 variable display game is executed next to the special figure 2 variable display game whose result is a “big hit”, the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next is executed. At the start of (t33 to t34), the display modes of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 of the display device 41 are the result modes of "big hit". Further, at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game (t33 to t34) to be executed next, the special figure 1 of the batch display device 50
Since the result of the previous special figure 1 variable display game is displayed on the display 51, the previous special figure 1
When the result of the variable display game is "missing", as shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, the batch display device 50 is started at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game (t33 to t34) to be executed next. The display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 of FIG. 1 is a result mode of “off”.

Therefore, there is a case where the result mode of "off" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display 51 of the batch display device 50, and the special figure 1 is next to the special figure 2 variable display game in which the result is "big hit". When executing the variable display game, the stop symbol (big hit symbol) of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the stop symbol (missing symbol) of the special figure 1 display 51 are aligned. The variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next (variable display on the special figure 1 display 51) and the decorative special figure variable display corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next. The variable display of the game (variable display in the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82) will be started.

Further, there is a case where the result mode of "off" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display 51 of the batch display device 50, and the special figure 2 is next to the special figure 2 variable display game in which the result is "small hit". 1 Similarly, when executing the variable display game, the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 8
In a state where the stop symbol (small hit symbol) of 2 and the stop symbol (missing symbol) of the special figure 1 display 51 do not match, the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next, and the next The variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed will be started.

That is, there is a case where the result mode of "missing" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display 51 of the batch display device 50, and the special figure 1 is next to the special figure 2 variable display game in which the result is "hit". When executing the variable display game, the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82
In a state where the stop symbol (hit symbol) of the special figure 1 and the stop symbol (missing symbol) of the special figure 1 display 51 do not match, the variation display of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next and the next execution Special figure 1
The variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the variable display game will be started.

In the case where the result mode of "missing" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display 51 of the batch display device 50, the special figure 1 variable display is next to the special figure 2 variable display game in which the result is "hit". In order to start the variable display in a state where the stop symbols of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 1 display 51 are aligned when the game is executed. At the start of the special figure 1 variable display game (t33 to t34) to be executed next, the result mode of "off" is displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 (previous game). result(
It is necessary to display the "hit" result mode) and then the "miss" result mode, or to display the "miss" result mode without displaying the previous game result). There is. Alternatively, at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game (t33 to t34) to be executed next, it is necessary to display the result mode of "hit" on the special figure 1 display 51.

Then, the player may be given the illusion that the special figure variation display game has been executed even though the special figure start memory has not been digested. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even if the stop symbols of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 1 display 51 are inconsistent, they are inconsistent. Since the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game is started, it is possible to prevent the game situation from being erroneously recognized and to the player. It is possible to smoothly proceed with the variable display game without giving a sense of discomfort.

25 and 26 show a case where the special figure 2 variable display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variable display game whose result is “normal jackpot”. FIG. 25 is an example of display on the display device 41 and the batch display device 50, and FIG. 26 is an example of a timing chart.
In FIG. 25A, the first start memory number is 1 and the second start memory number is 0 during the stop display time of the special figure 1 variable display game in which the result is “missing”. Indicates the state. Here, since the game result is "missing", in the display device 41, the display mode of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 is one of the "missing" result modes. It is "123", and in the batch display device 50, the special figure 1 display 51
The display mode of is the result mode of "off". Further, in the example shown in FIG. 25 (a), the display mode of the special figure 2 display 52 is one of the result modes of the “probability variation jackpot”.

Here, since the game result is "out of place", the first start memory number is 1, and the second start memory number is 0, the special figure variation display game and decoration are displayed when the stop display time ends. The special figure variation display game ends, and the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts. Special Figure 1 When the fluctuation time of the variable display game starts, FIG. 25 (b)
), The display device 41 displays that the decorative special figure start storage display at the left end of the standby storage display unit 83 shifts to the execution storage display unit 84, and also displays the first start storage number. The numerical value of the unit 85a changes, and in the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 hold display 53 changes.

Special Figure 1 When the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable time of the variable display game, the display device 41
In, the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game starts, and in the batch display device 50, the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game starts.
Special Figure 1 When a game ball wins a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 and a second start memory (second special figure hold) occurs during execution of the variable display game, the display device 41 is shown in FIG. 25 (c). In, the numerical value of the second start storage number display unit 85b changes, and in the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 hold display 54 changes.

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t4).
1), as shown in FIGS. 25 (d) and 26, in the display device 41, the variable display is completed and the game result is displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82. At the same time, the decorative special figure start memory display (decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory) of the running memory display unit 84 disappears. Further, in the batch display device 50, the variation display is completed and the game result is displayed on the special figure 1 display 51. Here, since the game result is a "normal jackpot", in the display device 41, the display mode of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 is one of the result modes of the "normal jackpot". In the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 is one of the result modes of the "normal jackpot".

Further, here, since the game result is "big hit", the first start memory number is 0, and the second start memory number is 1, when the stop display time ends, the special figure variation display game and decoration The special figure variation display game ends and the first special game state starts (t42), and when the ending time of the jackpot ends, the first special game state ends and the next special figure variation display game is a special figure. 2 The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display game starts (t43). Special Figure 2 When the fluctuation time of the variable display game starts, in the display device 41, as shown in FIG. 25 (e), the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the second start memory is displayed on the standby storage display unit 83. Displayed, then FIG. 25
As shown in (f), the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 is displayed to shift to the running memory display unit 84, and the numerical value of the second start memory number display unit 85b is displayed. Changes. Further, in the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 hold display 54 changes.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 are hidden at the same time as the start of the special gaming state, and then the first decorative game is displayed at the same time as the start of the variable time. The display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 reappear. Then, the result of the previous special figure variation display game is first displayed on the reappearing first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82. Here, the result of the previous special figure fluctuation display game is "
Since it is "222" (see FIG. 25 (d)), as shown in FIGS. 25 (e) and 26, the first decorative game display unit 81 and the state in which "222" is stopped and displayed at the same time as the start of the fluctuation time Second
The decorative game display unit 82 appears (t43). Since the variable display of the decorative special figure variation display game is started when the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable time, the period from the start of the variable time to the elapse of the first predetermined time (t43 to t44). , 1st decoration game display 81 and 2nd
The display mode of the decorative game display unit 82 does not change, and the state in which "222" is stopped and displayed is maintained.

Further, the display modes of the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50 are the same as those before the start of the special game state even during the special game state (see FIG. 25 (d)). Is maintained at. Then, since the variation display of the special figure variation display game is also started when the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation time, as shown in FIG. 26, the decorative special figure variation display game starts from the start of the stop display time. The display modes of the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 do not change until the start of the variable display (t41 to t44).

When the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation time (t44), as shown in FIG. 26, the first decorative game display unit 81 of the display device 41 initially displays a low speed fluctuation (variation display at an identifiable speed). ) Is performed, the fluctuation speed gradually increases during this low-speed fluctuation (t44 to t45), and then high-speed fluctuation (variation display at a speed that is difficult to identify) is performed as shown in FIG. 25 (f). t45 ~
t46). After that, as shown in FIG. 25 (g), the high-speed fluctuation ends and the low-speed fluctuation starts (t).
46), the fluctuation speed gradually decreases during this low-speed fluctuation (t46 to t47), and eventually a temporary stop state is reached (t47 to t49). As shown in FIG. 25 (h), if the same identification information is temporarily stopped in the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area, the reach state is reached and the reach fluctuation is started (t48).
In FIG. 26, for convenience, only the timing of the identification information to be displayed in the left variable display area is shown as the identification information (large symbol) of the first decorative game display unit 81.

On the other hand, in the second decorative game display unit 82 of the display device 41, high-speed fluctuation is performed from the beginning to the end. That is, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable time (t44 to t49), the display mode of the identification information (small symbol) of the second decorative game display unit 82 is maintained in the high-speed variable display mode. Further, in the batch display device 50, from the start of the fluctuation display to the end of the fluctuation time (t4).
4 to t49), the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 (here, the special figure 2 display 52) is maintained in a mode corresponding to “changing”.

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t4).
9), as shown in FIGS. 25 (i) and 26, in the display device 41, the variable display is completed and the game result is displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82. At the same time, the decorative special figure start memory display (decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the second start memory) of the running memory display unit 84 disappears. Further, in the batch display device 50, the variation display is completed and the game result is displayed on the special figure 2 display 52. After that, the special figure variation display game and the decorative special figure variation display game end with the end of the stop display time. Here, since the game result is "out of place" and there is no start memory, the game shifts to the customer waiting state.

Of course, even when the game result is "hit", the game proceeds in the same manner as when the game result is "missing". That is, when the game result is "hit", only FIG. 25 (i) of FIGS. 25 (a) to 25 (i) is different. Specifically, the game result is "
In the case of "hit", in FIG. 25 (i), the display mode of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 is one of the result modes of "hit", and the special figure 2 The display mode of the display 52 is one of the “hit” result modes.

As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, when the special figure 2 variable display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variable display game whose result is "normal jackpot", the special figure 2 variable display to be executed next is executed. At the start of the game (t43 to t44), the display modes of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 of the display device 41 are the result modes of "normal jackpot". Further, at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game (t43 to t44) to be executed next, the batch display device 50
Since the result of the previous special figure 2 variable display game is displayed on the special figure 2 display 52 of the above, when the result of the previous special figure 2 variable display game is "probability variation jackpot", FIG. 25 and As shown in FIG. 26, at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game (t43 to t44) to be executed next, the display mode of the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50 is the result mode of the “probability variation jackpot”. Is.

Therefore, there is a case where the result mode of "probability variation jackpot" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50, and the result is "normal jackpot" next to the special figure 1 variable display game. FIG. 2 When executing the variable display game, the stop symbol (normal jackpot symbol) of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the stop symbol (probability variable jackpot symbol) of the special figure 2 display 52 are executed. ) Is inconsistent with the variable display of the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next (variable display on the special figure 2 display 52) and the decoration corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next. The variable display of the special figure variable display game (variable display in the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82) will be started.

Further, when the result mode of the "normal jackpot" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50, the special figure 1 variable display game in which the result is the "probability variable jackpot" is next to the special figure 1. Figure 2
Similarly, when executing the variable display game, the stop symbol of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 (probability variable jackpot symbol) and the stop symbol of the special figure 2 display 52 (normal jackpot symbol). The variable display of the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next and the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next are started in a state of inconsistency with. The Rukoto.

That is, there is a case where the result mode of the "first big hit" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50, and the result is a "second big hit" different from the first big hit. When the special figure 2 variable display game is executed next to the variable display game, the stop symbol (second jackpot symbol) of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the special figure 2 Display 5
In a state where the stop symbol (1st jackpot symbol) of 2 does not match, the variable display of the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next and the decorative special figure corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next. Variable display The variable display of the game will be started.
Here, one of the "normal jackpot" and the "probability variable jackpot" is referred to as the "first jackpot".
The other is the "second jackpot", but it is not limited to this. For example, "10R jackpot", "7
Of "R jackpot" and "2R jackpot", one is "first jackpot" and the other one is "second jackpot".
Similarly, in the case of "big hit", the variable display of the next game is started in a state where the stop symbols do not match.

For example, when the result mode of the "probability variation jackpot" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50, the special figure 1 variable display game in which the result is the "normal jackpot" is next to the special figure 1. FIG. 2 When executing a variable display game, variable display is started in a state where the stop symbols of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 2 display 52 are aligned. In order to do so, at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game (t43 to t44) to be executed next, the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 are provided with the result mode of "probability variation jackpot". The display (the result mode of the previous game result (“normal jackpot” result mode) may be displayed and then the result mode of the “probability change jackpot” may be displayed, or the result of the “probability change jackpot” may be displayed without displaying the previous game result. The mode may be displayed). Alternatively, at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game (t43 to t44) to be executed next, it is necessary to display the result mode of the "normal big hit" on the special figure 2 display 52.

Then, the player may be given the illusion that the special figure variation display game has been executed even though the special figure start memory has not been digested. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even if the stop symbols of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 2 display 52 are inconsistent, they are inconsistent. Since the variable display of the special figure 2 variable display game and the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game is started, it is possible to avoid erroneous recognition of the game situation and the player It is possible to smoothly proceed with the variable display game without giving a sense of discomfort.
In the game machine of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the game ball is in the high probability state depending on whether or not the game ball flows into the specific area (probability variation operation region), so even if the jackpot type is the probability variation jackpot. If the game ball does not flow into the specific area, the high probability state does not occur, and even if the jackpot type is a normal big hit, if the game ball flows into the specific area, the high probability state occurs.

27 and 28 show a case where the special figure 1 variable display game is executed next to the special figure 2 variable display game whose result is “normal jackpot”. FIG. 27 is an example of display on the display device 41 and the batch display device 50, and FIG. 28 is an example of a timing chart.
In FIG. 27A, the first start memory number is 0 and the second start memory number is 1 during the stop display time of the special figure 2 variable display game in which the result is “missing”. Indicates the state. Here, since the game result is "missing", in the display device 41, the display mode of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 is one of the "missing" result modes. It is "123", and in the batch display device 50, the special figure 2 display 52
The display mode of is the result mode of "off". Further, in the example shown in FIG. 27 (a), the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 is one of the result modes of the “probability variation jackpot”.

Here, since the game result is "off", the first start memory number is 0, and the second start memory number is 1, when the stop display time ends, the special figure variation display game and decoration The special figure variation display game ends, and the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts. Special Figure 2 When the fluctuation time of the variable display game starts, FIG. 27 (b)
), The display device 41 displays that the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 shifts to the running memory display unit 84, and also displays the second start memory number. The numerical value of the unit 85b changes, and in the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 hold display 54 changes.

Special Figure 2 When the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable time of the variable display game, the display device 41
In, the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game starts, and in the batch display device 50, the variable display of the special figure 2 variable display game starts.
When the game ball wins a prize in the start winning opening 36 and the first start memory (first special figure hold) occurs during the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game, the display device 41 shows as shown in FIG. 27 (c). Is the first
The numerical value of the start storage number display unit 85a changes, and in the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 hold display 53 changes.

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t5).
1), as shown in FIGS. 27 (d) and 28, in the display device 41, the variable display is completed and the game result is displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82. At the same time, the decorative special figure start memory display (decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the second start memory) of the running memory display unit 84 disappears. Further, in the batch display device 50, the variation display is completed and the game result is displayed on the special figure 2 display 52. Here, since the game result is a "normal jackpot", in the display device 41, the display mode of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 is one of the result modes of the "normal jackpot". In the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 display 52 is one of the result modes of the "normal jackpot".

Further, here, since the game result is a "big hit", the first start memory number is 1, and the second start memory number is 0, the special figure variation display game and decoration are displayed when the stop display time ends. The special figure variation display game ends and the first special game state starts (t52), and when the ending time of the jackpot ends, the first special game state ends and the next special figure variation display game is a special figure. 1 The variable time of the variable display game starts (t53). When the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game starts, in the display device 41, as shown in FIG. 27 (e), the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory is displayed on the standby storage display unit 83. Displayed, then FIG. 27
As shown in (f), the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 is displayed to shift to the running memory display unit 84, and the numerical value of the first start memory number display unit 85a is displayed. Changes. Further, in the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 hold display 53 changes.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 are hidden at the same time as the start of the special gaming state, and then the first decorative game is displayed at the same time as the start of the variable time. The display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 reappear. Then, the result of the previous special figure variation display game is first displayed on the reappearing first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82. Here, the result of the previous special figure fluctuation display game is "
Since it is "222" (see FIG. 27 (d)), as shown in FIGS. 27 (e) and 28, the first decorative game display unit 81 and the state in which "222" is stopped and displayed at the same time as the start of the fluctuation time Second
The decorative game display unit 82 appears (t53). Since the variable display of the decorative special figure variation display game is started when the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable time, the period from the start of the variable time to the elapse of the first predetermined time (t53 to t54). , 1st decoration game display 81 and 2nd
The display mode of the decorative game display unit 82 does not change, and the state in which "222" is stopped and displayed is maintained.

Further, the display modes of the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50 are the same as those before the start of the special game state even during the special game state (see FIG. 27 (d)). Is maintained at. Then, since the variation display of the special figure variation display game is also started when the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variation time, as shown in FIG. 28, the decorative special figure variation display game starts from the start of the stop display time. The display modes of the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 do not change until the start of the variable display (t51 to t54).

When the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation time (t54), as shown in FIG. 28, the first decorative game display unit 81 of the display device 41 initially displays a low speed fluctuation (variation display at an identifiable speed). ) Is performed, the fluctuation speed gradually increases during this low-speed fluctuation (t54 to t55), and then high-speed fluctuation (variation display at a speed that is difficult to identify) is performed as shown in FIG. 27 (f). t55-5
t56). After that, as shown in FIG. 27 (g), the high-speed fluctuation ends and the low-speed fluctuation starts (t).
56), the fluctuation speed gradually decreases during this low-speed fluctuation (t56 to t57), and eventually a temporary stop state is reached (t57 to t59). As shown in FIG. 27 (h), if the same identification information is temporarily stopped in the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area, the reach state is reached and the reach fluctuation is started (t58).
In FIG. 28, for convenience, only the timing of the identification information to be displayed in the left variable display area is shown as the identification information (large symbol) of the first decorative game display unit 81.

On the other hand, in the second decorative game display unit 82 of the display device 41, high-speed fluctuation is performed from the beginning to the end. That is, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable time (t54 to t59), the display mode of the identification information (small symbol) of the second decorative game display unit 82 is maintained in the high-speed variable display mode. Further, in the batch display device 50, from the start of the fluctuation display to the end of the fluctuation time (t5).
4 to t59), the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 (here, the special figure 1 display 51) is maintained in a mode corresponding to “changing”.

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t5).
9), as shown in FIGS. 27 (i) and 28, in the display device 41, the variable display is completed and the game result is displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82. At the same time, the decorative special figure start memory display (decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory) of the running memory display unit 84 disappears. Further, in the batch display device 50, the variation display is completed and the game result is displayed on the special figure 1 display 51. After that, the special figure variation display game and the decorative special figure variation display game end with the end of the stop display time. Here, since the game result is "out of place" and there is no start memory, the game shifts to the customer waiting state.

Of course, even when the game result is "hit", the game proceeds in the same manner as when the game result is "missing". That is, when the game result is "hit", only FIG. 27 (i) is different from FIGS. 27 (a) to 27 (i). Specifically, the game result is "
In the case of "hit", in FIG. 27 (i), the display mode of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 is one of the result modes of "hit", and the special figure 1 The display mode of the display 51 is one of the “hit” result modes.

As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, when the special figure 1 variable display game is executed next to the special figure 2 variable display game whose result is "normal jackpot", the special figure 1 variable display to be executed next is executed. At the start of the game (t53 to t54), the display modes of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 of the display device 41 are the result modes of "normal jackpot". Further, at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game (t53 to t54) to be executed next, the batch display device 50
Since the result of the previous special figure 1 variable display game is displayed on the special figure 1 display 51 of the above, when the result of the previous special figure 1 variable display game is "probability variation jackpot", FIG. 27 and As shown in FIG. 28, at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game (t53 to t54) to be executed next, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 of the batch display device 50 is a result mode of "probability variation jackpot". Is.

Therefore, there is a case where the result mode of the "probability variation jackpot" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display 51 of the batch display device 50, and the result is "normal jackpot" next to the special figure 2 variable display game. FIG. 1 When executing a variable display game, a stop symbol (normal jackpot symbol) of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and a stop symbol (probability variable jackpot symbol) of the special figure 1 display 51 are executed. ) Is inconsistent with the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next (variable display on the special figure 1 display 51) and the decoration corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next. The variable display of the special figure variable display game (variable display in the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82) will be started.

Further, when the result mode of the "normal jackpot" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display 51 of the batch display device 50, the special figure 2 variable display game in which the result is the "probability variable jackpot" is next to the special figure 2. Figure 1
Similarly, when executing the variable display game, the stop symbol of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 (probability variable jackpot symbol) and the stop symbol of the special figure 1 display 51 (normal jackpot symbol). The variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next and the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next are started in a state of inconsistency with. The Rukoto.

That is, there is a case where the result mode of the "first big hit" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display 51 of the batch display device 50, and the result is a "second big hit" different from the first big hit. When the special figure 1 variable display game is executed next to the variable display game, the stop symbol (second jackpot symbol) of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the special figure 1 Display 5
In a state where the stop symbol (1st jackpot symbol) of 1 does not match, the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next and the decorative special figure corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next. Variable display The variable display of the game will be started.
Here, one of the "probability variable jackpot" and the "normal jackpot" is referred to as the "first jackpot".
The other is the "second jackpot", but it is not limited to this. For example, "10R jackpot", "7
Of "R jackpot" and "2R jackpot", one is "first jackpot" and the other one is "second jackpot".
Similarly, in the case of "big hit", the variable display of the next game is started in a state where the stop symbols do not match.

For example, in the case where the result mode of the "probability variation jackpot" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display 51 of the batch display device 50, the special figure 2 variable display game in which the result is the "normal jackpot" is next to the special figure 2. FIG. 1 When executing a variable display game, variable display is started in a state where the stop symbols of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 1 display 51 are aligned. In order to do so, at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game (t53 to t54) to be executed next, the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 are provided with the result mode of "probability variation jackpot". The display (the result mode of the previous game result (the result mode of the "normal jackpot") may be displayed and then the result mode of the "probability change jackpot" may be displayed, or the result of the "probability change jackpot" may be displayed without displaying the previous game result. The mode may be displayed). Alternatively, at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game (t53 to t54) to be executed next, it is necessary to display the result mode of the "normal big hit" on the special figure 1 display 51.

Then, the player may be given the illusion that the special figure variation display game has been executed even though the special figure start memory has not been digested. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even if the stop symbols of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 1 display 51 are inconsistent, they are inconsistent. Since the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game is started, it is possible to prevent the game situation from being erroneously recognized and to the player. It is possible to smoothly proceed with the variable display game without giving a sense of discomfort.

As described above, in the present embodiment, at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game (between the start of the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game and the start of the variable display), the first display device 41 The stop symbol of the decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82, and the special figure 1 of the batch display device 50.
If the stop symbol of the display 51 is consistent, the variation of the special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game remains in the matched state. If the display is not consistent, the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game is started in the inconsistent state. Therefore, the progress of the game can be smoothly performed.

Further, at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game (between the start of the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game and the start of the variable display), the first decorative game display unit 81 and the first display device 41 of the display device 41 2
If the stop symbol of the decorative game display unit 82 and the stop symbol of the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50 match, the special figure 2 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game and the stop symbol of the special figure 2 display unit 52 remain in the matched state. Ornamental special figure corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game The variable display of the special figure variable display game is started, and if it is not consistent, the special figure 2 variable display game and the special figure are left in the inconsistent state. 2 Ornamental special figure corresponding to the variable display game Since the variable display of the variable display game is started, the game can be smoothly progressed.

Hereinafter, when the stop symbol of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the stop symbol of the special figure 1 display 51 match at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the special figure 2 The case where the stop symbol of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the stop symbol of the special figure 2 display 52 match at the start of the variable display game is simply "matched". If there is, it is called.
Further, when the stop symbol of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the stop symbol of the special figure 1 display 51 do not match at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game, the special figure 2
The case where the stop symbol of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the stop symbol of the special figure 2 display 52 do not match at the start of the variable display game is simply "inconsistent". Called "case".

In the above description, as an example of "in the case of matching", a case where the special figure 1 variable display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variable display game, and a case where the special figure 2 variable display game is followed by the special figure 2 variable display game. Although the case of executing the display game is mentioned, the “case of matching” is not limited to these cases. For example, in the case where the result mode of "big hit" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50, the special figure 2 is next to the special figure 1 variable display game in which the result is "big hit". When the variable display game is executed, or when the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50 stops and displays the result mode of "off", the special figure 1 variable display in which the result is "off". When the special figure 2 variable display game is executed next to the game, it is also “when consistent”.

Further, in the above description, as an example of "inconsistency", the result mode of "off" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50, and the result is "hit". When the special figure 2 variable display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variable display game (see FIGS. 21 and 22), the result mode of “missing” on the special figure 1 display 51 of the batch display device 50 When the special figure 2 variable display game is followed by the special figure 1 variable display game (see FIGS. 23 and 24) in which is stopped and the result is "hit", the batch display device 50 The special figure 2 variable display game is next to the special figure 1 variable display game in which the result mode of the "first big hit" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display 52 of the above, and the result is the "second big hit". (See FIGS. 25 and 26) and when the result mode of "first jackpot" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display 51 of the batch display device 50, and the result is "second jackpot". The case where the special figure 1 variable display game is executed next to the special figure 2 variable display game (see FIGS. 27 and 28) is mentioned, but the “inconsistent case” is limited to these cases. Not done. For example, special drawing 2 of the batch display device 50.
When the result mode of "hit" is stopped and displayed on the display 52 and the result is "missing", the special figure 2 variable display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variable display game, or the batch display is performed. When the result mode of "either big hit or small hit" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display 52 of the device 50, the result is "either big hit or small hit". Figure 1
Even when the special figure 2 variable display game is executed next to the variable display game, "when they are not consistent"
Will be.

Here, the identification information (large symbol) of the first decorative game display unit 81 starts low-speed fluctuation (starts fluctuation display) in the order of the left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area, and then left. High-speed fluctuation is started at the same time in the fluctuation display area, right fluctuation display area, and medium fluctuation display area (low-speed fluctuation is finished), and then high-speed fluctuation is performed in the order of left fluctuation display area, right fluctuation display area, and medium fluctuation display area. End (start low-speed fluctuation).
As shown in FIGS. 20, 22, 24, 26, and 28, the effect control device 300 is the first.
In order to stop and display the desired result mode (here, "424") on the decorative game display unit 81,
The identification information (large symbol) of the first decorative game display unit 81 is set at the start of high-speed fluctuation (t15, t25).
, T35, t45, t55) and at the end of high-speed fluctuation (t16, t26, t36, t46,
Replace with t56).

For example, in the examples shown in FIGS. 20, 22, and 24, the result of the previous special figure variation display game is ".
Since it is "333", the variable display starting from "333" starts (t14, t24, t3).
4). Then, the effect control device 300 starts the high-speed fluctuation of the large symbol (t15, t25, t).
In 35), a variable display starting with "333" is displayed in a predetermined fixed result mode (for example, "33").
The first replacement process for replacing the variable display starting with 123 ") is executed. In addition, at the end of the high-speed fluctuation of the large symbol (t16, t26, t36), the fluctuation display starting from the fixed result mode is displayed.
The second replacement that starts with the result mode calculated back based on the game result, the remaining fluctuation time (t16 to t19, t26 to t29, t36 to t39), the fluctuation pattern (whether or not a reach state has occurred, etc.), etc. Execute the process.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 26 and 28, since the result of the previous special figure variation display game is “222”, the variation display starting from “222” starts (t44, t54). Then, the effect control device 300 displays the fluctuation display starting from "222" at the start of high-speed fluctuation of the large symbol (t45, t55), and the fluctuation display starting from a predetermined fixed result mode (for example, "123"). The first replacement process of replacing with is executed. Also, at the end of high-speed fluctuation of a large symbol (t46, t)
In 56), a variable display starting from a fixed result mode is displayed for the game result and the remaining variable time (t46).
~ T49, t56 to t59) and the fluctuation pattern (whether or not a reach state has occurred, etc.) and the like, the second replacement process for replacing the fluctuation display starting from the result mode calculated back is executed.
Execution of these replacement processes is reserved, for example, in variable command processing (step C236 in FIG. 18).

It is also possible to replace the large symbol during low-speed fluctuation or temporary stop display in order to stop and display the desired result mode on the first decorative game display unit 81. However, in that case, the player may notice that the large symbol has been replaced, and the interest of the game may be reduced. On the other hand, by replacing the large symbol during high-speed fluctuation as in the present embodiment, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the large symbol has been replaced.

The timing of replacing the large symbol can be changed as appropriate during high-speed fluctuation of the large symbol.
Further, the number of times the large symbol is replaced is not limited to two, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the number of times to replace the large symbol may be one, and in that case, the second replacement process is not executed.
It is good to execute only the replacement process. Specifically, for example, the timing may be the start of the high-speed fluctuation of the large symbol (or the timing after the start of the high-speed fluctuation of the large symbol and before the end of the high-speed fluctuation, or the large symbol. (It may be at the end of the high-speed fluctuation of), the fluctuation display starting from the result mode of the previous special figure fluctuation display game is replaced with the fluctuation display starting from the result mode calculated back based on the game result etc. It is good to execute the process. Further, when the number of times to replace the large symbol is a plurality of times, the last replacement process may be the second replacement process.

Further, the first decorative game display unit 81 does not perform the reach fluctuation from the high-speed fluctuation via the low-speed fluctuation, but may perform the reach fluctuation as it is from the high-speed fluctuation without passing through the low-speed fluctuation. When not passing through the low-speed fluctuation, for example, at the end of the high-speed fluctuation of the large symbol, the large symbol (for example, the left symbol and the right symbol) temporarily stopped and displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81 is set to the desired reach mode (desired). You may perform the replacement process to replace it with the reach symbol).

On the other hand, the identification information (small symbol) of the second decorative game display unit 82 starts high-speed fluctuation at the same time in the left region, the right region, and the middle region (starts the fluctuation display), and then starts the fluctuation display in the left region, the right region, and the middle region. End high-speed fluctuation (end fluctuation display) at the same time as the area.
As shown in FIGS. 20, 22, 24, 26, and 28, the effect control device 300 has a second effect control device 300.
In order to stop and display the desired result mode (here, "424") on the decorative game display unit 82,
The identification information (small symbol) of the second decorative game display unit 82 is displayed at the end of high-speed fluctuation (t19, t29).
, T39, t49, t59). Specifically, at the end of the high-speed fluctuation of the small symbol,
It is configured to perform a third replacement process for replacing the small symbol stopped and displayed on the second decorative game display unit 82 with a desired result mode.
The execution of the third replacement process is reserved, for example, in the variable command process (step C236 in FIG. 18).

The timing of replacing the small symbol can be changed as appropriate during high-speed fluctuation of the small symbol. When the small symbol is replaced at a timing other than the end of the high-speed fluctuation of the small symbol, the first replacement process for replacing the small symbol with the variation display starting from a predetermined fixed result mode may be executed, or the game result or the game result or A second replacement process may be executed to replace the variable display starting from the result mode calculated back based on the remaining fluctuation time, fluctuation pattern, and the like.
When executing the second replacement process for replacing the small symbols, it is not necessary to execute the third replacement process at the end of the high-speed fluctuation of the small symbols.
Further, when executing the first replacement process for replacing the small symbol, the second replacement process for replacing the small symbol is executed after the first replacement process, or the high speed of the small symbol is executed. It is advisable to execute the third replacement process at the end of the fluctuation.

Further, the number of times the small symbols are replaced may be once or may be a plurality of times. When the number of times the small symbols are replaced is one, it is preferable to execute only the second replacement process or only the third replacement process without executing the first replacement process. When the number of times the small symbols are replaced is a plurality of times, the last replacement process may be the second replacement process or the third replacement process.

In the present embodiment, the time from the start of the fluctuation time to the start of the fluctuation display is "when consistent" (for example, t13 to t14) and "when not consistent" (for example, t23 to t).
24, t33 to t34, t43 to t44, t53 to t54) are the same.
Further, the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the start of the high-speed fluctuation of the large symbol is "when consistent" (for example, t14 to t15) and "when not consistent" (for example, t24 to t25,
It is the same as t34 to t35, t44 to t45, t54 to t55).
Further, the time from the start of the high-speed fluctuation of the large symbol to the end of the high-speed fluctuation of the large symbol is "when consistent" (for example, t15 to t16) and "when not consistent" (for example, t25 to).
It is the same as t26, t35-t36, t45-t46, t55-t56).

Further, the time from the start of the low-speed fluctuation of the large symbol to the end of the low-speed fluctuation of the large symbol is "when consistent" (for example, t16 to t17) and "when not consistent" (for example, t26-).
It is the same as t27, t36 to t37, t46 to t47, t56 to t57).
Further, the time from the start of the temporary stop display of the large symbol to the start of the reach fluctuation of the large symbol is "when consistent" (for example, t17 to t18) and "when not consistent" (for example, t2).
7 to t28, t37 to t38, t47 to t48, t57 to t58) are the same.
Further, the time from the start of the reach fluctuation of the large symbol to the end of the fluctuation time is "when consistent" (for example, t18 to t19) and "when not consistent" (for example, t28 to t29).
, T38 to t39, t48 to t49, t58 to t59).

In this way, the time from the start of the fluctuation time to the start of the fluctuation display, the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the start of the high-speed fluctuation of the large symbol, and the start of the high-speed fluctuation of the large symbol to the end of the high-speed fluctuation of the large symbol Time to, the time from the start of the low-speed fluctuation of the large symbol to the end of the low-speed fluctuation of the large symbol, the time from the start of the temporary stop display of the large symbol to the start of the reach fluctuation of the large symbol, and the reach of the large symbol. By making each time from the start of the fluctuation to the end of the fluctuation time the same for "inconsistent" and "inconsistent", the variation display is started in an inconsistent state. The fluctuation time when the fluctuation display is started can be set to the same time as the fluctuation time when the fluctuation display is started in a consistent state. That is, it is not necessary to determine whether or not they are consistent when determining the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern).
It should be noted that at least one of these times may be different depending on whether the time is “consistent” or “inconsistent”. If they are different, it is necessary to determine whether or not they are consistent when determining the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern), so that the processing load increases accordingly.

From the above, the game machine 10 of the present embodiment executes a variable display game (special figure variable display game) that variablely displays the identification information based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the result mode of the variable display game is a special result. A gaming machine that generates a special gaming state when it becomes a mode, and as a variable display game, a first variable display game based on the establishment of the first start condition (winning to the start winning opening 36) of the start conditions. The first variable display means (special figure 1 display 51) capable of displaying (special figure 1 variable display game) and the second start condition of the start conditions are satisfied as the variable display game (to the normal variable winning device 37). Controls the second variable display means (special figure 2 display 52) capable of displaying the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) based on the winning), the first variable display means, and the second variable display means. A game control means (game control device 100) and an identification symbol (identification symbol) corresponding to a variable display game.
An effect display means capable of displaying a first decorative game that displays a large pattern) in a variable manner and a second decorative game that supports a variable display game and displays a smaller identification symbol (small symbol) in a variable manner than the first decorative game. (Display device 41) and effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effect display means.
When the second variable display game is executed next to the first variable display game, the second variable display game is executed.
At the start of the variable display game, the result mode that is stopped and displayed on the second variable display means and the result mode of the first decorative game (and / or the second decorative game) that is stopped and displayed on the effect display means are In some cases, the game control means starts the variable display of the identification information in the second variable display game without performing the process of making these result modes consistent. However, the effect control means is configured to start the variable display of the identification symbol in the first decorative game (and / or the second decorative game) corresponding to the second variable display game (FIGS. 21 and 25). reference).

Therefore, at the start of the second variable display game (between the start of the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game and the start of the variable display), the stop symbol of the effect display means (display device 41) and the stop symbol.
If the stop symbol of the second variable display means (special figure 2 display 52) does not match, the second variable display game and the second variable display game are supported in the inconsistent state. Since the variable display of the first decoration game (and / or the second decoration game) starts, the game can be smoothly progressed, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

The first variable display game may be used as the special figure 2 variable display game, and the second variable display game may be used as the special figure 1 variable display game (see FIGS. 23 and 27).
In this case, at the start of the second variable display game (between the start of the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game and the start of the variable display), the stop symbol of the effect display means (display device 41) and the stop symbol. When the stop symbol of the second variation display means (special figure 1 display 51) does not match, the second variation display game and the second variation display game are supported in the inconsistent state. Since the variable display of the first decoration game (and / or the second decoration game) is started, the progress of the game can be smoothly performed, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Further, in the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, if the above is not consistent, the result mode of the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) becomes a special result mode (result mode of "hit"). At the end of the special gaming state that has occurred, the result mode that is stopped and displayed on the second variable display means (special figure 2 display 52) is a result mode other than the special result mode (result mode of "missing"). In addition, the number of start memories (first start memory) that is the execution right of the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) is 0, and that of the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game). The case where the number of start memories (second start memories) which is the execution right is one or more is included, and in that case, the game control means (game control device 100) becomes the first after the end of the special game state. 2 From the state in which the result mode other than the special result mode is stopped and displayed in the variable display means, the variable display of the identification information in the second variable display game is started, and the effect control means (effect control device 300) starts the variable display.
After the end of the special gaming state, the variation display starting from the special result mode is started as the variation display of the identification symbol in the first decoration game (and / or the second decoration game) corresponding to the second variation display game. It can be configured (see FIGS. 21 and 25).

With this configuration, at the start of the second variable display game (between the start of the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game and the start of the variable display), the effect display means (display device 41).
If the stop symbol of is a hit symbol and the stop symbol of the second variation display means (special figure 2 display 52) is an off symbol, the second variation display game and the second variation display are in that state. Since the variable display of the first decoration game (and / or the second decoration game) corresponding to the game can be started, the progress of the game can be smoothly performed, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. ..

The first variable display game may be used as the special figure 2 variable display game, and the second variable display game may be used as the special figure 1 variable display game (see FIGS. 23 and 27).
In this case, at the start of the second variable display game (between the start of the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game and the start of the variable display), the stop symbol of the effect display means (display device 41) hits. If it is a symbol and the stop symbol of the second variable display means (special figure 1 display 51) is an off symbol, the second variable display game and the second variable display game corresponding to the second variable display game are supported in that state. Since the variable display of the 1-decoration game (and / or the 2nd decoration game) can be started, the progress of the game can be smoothly performed, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Further, the special result mode at "at the end of the special gaming state generated when the result mode of the first variable display game becomes the special result mode" is not limited to the "hit" result mode. That is, the special result mode may be only the "big hit" result mode of the "hit" result modes, or only the "small hit" result mode of the "hits" result modes. It may be the result mode of "probability big hit" among the result modes of "hit", or only the result mode of "normal big hit" among the result modes of "hit". It is good, it may be only the result aspect of "10R big hit" among the result aspects of "hit", or it may be only the result aspect of "hit"
Only the result mode of "per 7R" may be used, or "per 2R" of the "hit" result modes.
It may be only the result aspect of.

In the present embodiment, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed in preference to the special figure 1 variable display game. That is, the game control means (game control device 300) is in a state in which the start memory that is the execution right of the special figure 1 variable display game and the start memory that is the execution right of the special figure 2 variable display game are stored. 2 The variable display game is configured to be executed with priority over the special figure 1 variable display game.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to execute the special figure 2 variable display game next to the special figure 1 variable display game, a special game generated in which the result mode of the special figure 1 variable display game becomes a special result mode. If the number of second start memories is one or more at the end of the state, the number of first start memories is 0.
It does not have to be one (that is, the number of first start storages may be one or more).
That is, in the gaming machine in which the special figure 2 variable display game is executed in preference to the special figure 1 variable display game, the first variable display game is set as the special figure 1 variable display game, and the second variable display game is set as the special figure 2 variable display game. In order to execute the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) after the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) in the display game, the first variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) is executed. At the end of the special gaming state in which the result mode of the special figure 1 variable display game is the special result mode, the start memory (the start memory that becomes the execution right of the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game))
It is necessary to satisfy the condition that "the number of the second start memory) is one or more", but the start memory (first start memory) which is the execution right of the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) Number is 0
It is not necessary to satisfy the condition of "individual".

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in order to execute the special figure 1 variable display game next to the special figure 2 variable display game, a special game generated in which the result mode of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a special result mode. At the end of the state, the first start memory number must be one or more and the second start memory number must be zero.
That is, in the gaming machine in which the special figure 2 variable display game is executed in preference to the special figure 1 variable display game, the first variable display game is set as the special figure 2 variable display game, and the second variable display game is set as the special figure 1 variable display game. In order to execute the second variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) after the first variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) in the display game, the first variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) is executed. At the end of the special gaming state that occurs when the result mode of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes the special result mode, the start memory (starting memory that becomes the execution right of the first variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game))
The condition that "the number of the second start memory) is 0" and "the number of start memories (first start memory) that is the execution right of the second variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) is 1 or more". It is necessary to satisfy both of the conditions of "is".

The game machine 10 may be a game machine in which the special figure 1 variable display game is executed in preference to the special figure 2 variable display game.
In this case, in order to execute the special figure 2 variable display game next to the special figure 1 variable display game, the end of the special gaming state generated in which the result mode of the special figure 1 variable display game becomes the special result mode. Occasionally, the number of second start memories needs to be one or more, and the number of first start memories needs to be zero.
That is, in the gaming machine in which the special figure 1 variable display game is executed in preference to the special figure 2 variable display game, the first variable display game is set as the special figure 1 variable display game, and the second variable display game is set as the special figure 2 variable display game. In order to execute the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) after the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) in the display game, the first variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) is executed. At the end of the special gaming state that occurs when the result mode of the special figure 1 variable display game becomes the special result mode, the start memory (starting memory that becomes the execution right of the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game))
The condition that "the number of the first start memory) is 0" and "the number of start memories (second start memory) that is the execution right of the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) is 1 or more". It is necessary to satisfy both of the conditions of "is".

On the other hand, in this case, in order to execute the special figure 1 variable display game next to the special figure 2 variable display game, the special gaming state generated in which the result mode of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a special result mode. As long as the number of first start storage is 1 or more at the end of, the number of second start storage may not be 0 (that is, the number of second start storage may be 1 or more).
That is, in the gaming machine in which the special figure 1 variable display game is executed in preference to the special figure 2 variable display game, the first variable display game is set as the special figure 2 variable display game, and the second variable display game is set as the special figure 1 variable. In order to execute the second variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) after the first variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) in the display game, the first variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) is executed. At the end of the special gaming state in which the result mode of the special figure 2 variable display game is the special result mode, the start memory (the start memory that becomes the execution right of the second variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game))
It is necessary to satisfy the condition that "the number of the first start memory) is one or more", but the start memory (second start memory) which is the execution right of the first variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) Number is 0
It is not necessary to satisfy the condition of "individual".

Further, the game machine 10 includes a first variable display game (one of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game) and a second variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game and special figure 2 variable display game). It may be a game machine that executes the other of the games) in the order of winning.
In this case, in order to execute the second variable display game after the first variable display game, at the end of the special gaming state in which the result mode of the first variable display game becomes the special result mode, " Both the condition that "the number of start-up memories that are the execution right of the first variable display game is 0" and the condition that "the number of start-up memories that are the execution right of the second variable display game is 1 or more". Satisfy, or "the earliest start memory of the start memory that is the execution right of the first variable display game and the start memory that is the execution right of the second variable display game is the execution right of the second variable display game. It is necessary to satisfy the condition that "it is a start memory".

That is, in the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100) stores the start memory that is the execution right of the first variable display game and the start memory that is the execution right of the second variable display game. In this state, it is possible to configure the variable display game (special figure variable display game) to be executed in the order of memory.
Then, in the case of such a configuration, if the above-mentioned inconsistency occurs,
At the end of the special gaming state in which the result mode of the first variable display game is the special result mode, the result mode stopped and displayed on the second variable display means is a result mode other than the special result mode. And the number of start memories that are the execution rights of the first variable display game is 0, and the number of start memories that are the execution rights of the second variable display game is 1 or more.
At the end of the special gaming state in which the result mode of the first variable display game is the special result mode, the result mode stopped and displayed on the second variable display means is a result mode other than the special result mode. In addition, the number of start memories that are the execution right of the first variable display game is one or more, and the number of start memories that are the execution right of the second variable display game is one or more. The case where the start memory stored first is the start memory which is the execution right of the second variable display game is included, and in those cases, the start memory is included.
After the end of the special game state, the game control means stops and displays a result mode other than the special result mode in the second variable display means, and then changes the identification information in the second variable display game. To start
After the end of the special gaming state, the effect control means starts from the special result mode as a variation display of the identification symbol in the first decoration game (and / or the second decoration game) corresponding to the second variation display game. It can be configured to start a variable display.

With this configuration, at the start of the second variable display game (between the start of the variable time and the start of the variable display), the stop symbol of the effect display means (display device 41) is a hit symbol. Yes, if the stop symbol of the second variable display means is an off symbol, the first decorative game (and / or the second decorative) corresponding to the second variable display game and the second variable display game remains in that state. Since the variable display of the game) can be started, the progress of the game can be smoothly performed, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Further, in the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the effect control means (effect control device 300) performs variable display of the identification symbol (large symbol) in the first decorative game, the display mode of the identification symbol is displayed. The variable display of the identification symbol in the first decorative game corresponding to the second variable display game can be converted into a low-speed variable display mode in which the identification symbol can be identified and a high-speed variable display mode in which the identification symbol is difficult to identify. The time from the start to the start of the low-speed fluctuation display mode via the high-speed fluctuation display mode is the result mode in which the second fluctuation display means is stopped and displayed at the start of the second fluctuation display game, and the effect display. When the result mode of the first decoration game stopped and displayed on the means is consistent (t14 to t16) and when is not consistent (t24 to t26, t3).
4 to t36, t44 to t46, t54 to 56) can be configured to be the same.
With this configuration, the variable time can be set to the same time depending on whether the variable display is started in an inconsistent state or the variable display is started in a consistent state. Compared with the configuration in which the time from the start of the fluctuation display of information (large symbol) to the start of low-speed fluctuation through high-speed fluctuation is different between "inconsistent" and "inconsistent". , It is possible to reduce the processing load.

Further, in the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the effect control means (effect control device 300) performs variable display of the identification symbol (small symbol) in the second decorative game, the display mode of the identification symbol is displayed. The identification symbol can be converted into a high-speed variable display mode that is difficult to identify, and after the variable display of the identification symbol in the second decorative game corresponding to the second variable display game starts, the variable display is displayed through the high-speed variable display mode. Time to finish (t14 to t19, t24 to t29, t
34 to t39, t44 to t49, t54 to 59) are the result mode in which the second variation display means is stopped and displayed at the start of the second variation display game, and the second variation display means is stopped and displayed. It is configured to be the same when the result aspect of the decoration game is consistent (t14 to t19) and when it is not consistent (t24 to t29, t34 to t39, t44 to t49, t54 to 59). be able to.
With this configuration, the variable time can be set to the same time depending on whether the variable display is started in an inconsistent state or the variable display is started in a consistent state. Compared with the configuration in which the time from the start of the fluctuation display of information (small symbols) to the stop of the fluctuation display after high-speed fluctuation is different between "inconsistent" and "inconsistent". , It is possible to reduce the processing load.

In the present embodiment, both the first decoration game and the second decoration game are displayed, but only one of the first decoration game and the second decoration game may be displayed. Specifically, for example, a mode in which the first decoration game and the second decoration game are displayed, a mode in which the first decoration game is displayed and the second decoration game is not displayed, and a mode in which the second decoration game is displayed are displayed. There may be a mode in which the decoration game is not displayed.

Further, the game machine 10 may be a game machine capable of simultaneously executing the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game.
For example, it is a gaming machine capable of simultaneously executing the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, and is a decorative special figure corresponding to the main variable (the special figure variable display game determined to be the main in each game state). In a game machine that displays only the variable display game and does not display the decorative special figure variable display game that corresponds to the irregular fluctuation (special figure variable display game that is determined not to be the main in each game state), the main fluctuation is switched. At the start of the first special figure variation display game, the stop symbol of the display device 41 and the stop symbol of the batch display device 50 may not match.
Specifically, when the special figure 1 variation display game is switched from the first game state in which the main variation is the main variation to the second game state in which the special figure 2 variation display game is the main variation, the second game state is displayed. At the start of the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed first, the stop symbols of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 of the display device 41 and the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50 It may not be consistent with the stop symbol. In that case, the variable display of the special figure 2 variable display game and the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game is started in an inconsistent state.

Further, when the special figure 2 variable display game is switched from the second game state in which the main fluctuation is the main fluctuation to the first game state in which the special figure 1 variable display game is the main fluctuation, the game is executed first in the first game state. At the start of the special figure 1 variable display game, the stop symbols of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 of the display device 41 and the special figure 1 display 51 of the batch display device 50
It may not be consistent with the stop symbol of. In that case, it remains inconsistent.
The variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game will be started.
As a result, the progress of the game can be smoothly performed, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Further, it is a gaming machine capable of simultaneously executing the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game, and the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the main variation is provided in the display area of the display device 41 as the main variation. In the game machine that displays on the display unit and displays the decorative special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the irregular fluctuation on the irregular fluctuation display unit provided in the display area of the display device 41, the main fluctuation is switched and the first special feature is displayed. At the start of the figure variation display game, the stop symbol of the main variation display unit of the display device 41 may not match the stop symbol of the batch display device 50.
Specifically, when the special figure 1 variation display game is switched from the first game state in which the main variation is the main variation to the second game state in which the special figure 2 variation display game is the main variation, the second game state is displayed. At the start of the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed first, the stop symbol of the main variable display unit of the display device 41 may not match the stop symbol of the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50. .. In that case, the variable display of the special figure 2 variable display game and the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game is started in an inconsistent state.

Further, when the special figure 2 variable display game is switched from the second game state in which the main fluctuation is the main fluctuation to the first game state in which the special figure 1 variable display game is the main fluctuation, the game is executed first in the first game state. At the start of the special figure 1 variable display game, the stop symbol of the main variable display unit of the display device 41 may not match the stop symbol of the special figure 1 display 51 of the batch display device 50. In that case, the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game shall be started in an inconsistent state.
As a result, the progress of the game can be smoothly performed, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, the gaming machine of the second embodiment will be described. It should be noted that basically, it has the same configuration as the game machine of the first embodiment described above, and mainly different parts will be described below. Specifically, the game machine of the second embodiment is different from the game machine of the first embodiment in that a support hit is provided as a result of the special figure variation display game.

FIG. 29 shows an example of the distribution rate in this embodiment.
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 29 (a), for example, there are four types of results of the special figure variation display game: a big hit, a small hit, and a support hit. Then, for the jackpot, for example, as shown in FIG. 29 (b), the probability variation A jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the jackpot symbol (result mode of the jackpot), and the probability variation A jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed. There are three types: B jackpot and normal jackpot where the normal jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed. For small hits, for example, FIG.
As shown in 9 (c), there are two types of small hit symbols (small hit result modes): small hit A in which the small hit A symbol is stopped and displayed, and small hit B in which the small hit B symbol is stopped and displayed. is there. Further, for the support hit, for example, as shown in FIG. 29 (d), the support hit symbol A and the support hit B symbol are stopped and displayed as the support hit symbol (result mode of the support hit). There are three types: B per support and C per support where the C symbol per support is stopped and displayed.

Probability change means that there is a high possibility that a game ball will flow into a specific area (probability change operation area) and a high probability state (probability change state) is likely to occur after the end of the special game state. It is shown that the possibility that the game ball flows in is low and it is difficult to reach the high probability state (probability change state) after the end of the special game state. In the game machine of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the game ball is in the high probability state depending on whether or not the game ball flows into the specific area (probability change operation area). If the game ball does not flow in, the high probability state does not occur, and even if the jackpot type is normal, if the game ball flows into a specific area, the high probability state occurs.

In the special gaming state (big hit gaming state) based on the derivation of the probability variation A jackpot and the probability variation B jackpot, the first special variation winning device 38 is opened in a specific round and the specific area (probability variation operation area) is opened. Do. The long opening with V is an opening mode in which the game ball is likely to flow into a specific region (probability variation operating region). And the first in a round other than a specific round
The special variable winning device 38 is opened, but the specific area is not opened. V-less opening is performed.
In the special game state (big hit game state) based on the normal jackpot derivation, the first in a specific round
A short-circuit opening with V is performed to open the special variable winning device 38 and open a specific area (probability variation operation area). The short opening with V is an opening mode lower than the long opening with V in which there is a possibility that the game ball may flow into a specific region (probability variation operating region). Then, in a round other than the specific round, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened, but the specific area is not opened, and V-less opening is performed.
In the special gaming state based on the derivation of the small hit (small hit gaming state), the second special variable winning device 3
9 is released.

FIG. 29A is an example of the distribution rate of the result of the special figure variation display game. In the present embodiment, the distribution rate of the result of the special figure variation display game is common to the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, but may be different between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.
Further, in FIG. 29A, the jackpot distribution rate is the same when the probability setting value is "setting 1", when it is "setting 2", and when it is "setting 3". However, it may be different. Further, in FIG. 29 (a), the probability setting value of the jackpot distribution rate is “setting 4”.
, The case of "setting 5", and the case of "setting 6" are the same, but may be different. Further, for example, the jackpot distribution rate in "setting 1" and the jackpot distribution rate in "setting 2" are set to the first distribution rate (for example, low probability: 219/65536, high probability: 2190).
/ 65536), and the jackpot distribution rate in "setting 3" and the jackpot distribution rate in "setting 4" are set to the second distribution rate (for example, low probability: 262/65536, high probability: 2620/65536). ), And the jackpot distribution rate in "setting 5" and the jackpot distribution rate in "setting 6" are set as the third distribution rate (for example, low probability: 291/65536, high probability: 2910/65536). Is also good.

Further, in FIG. 29A, the small hit distribution rate is the same regardless of the probability set value, but may be different. Further, in FIG. 29A, the small hit distribution rate is the same regardless of the probability state (whether it is a low probability state or a high probability state) of the special figure variation display game, but is different. You may be.
Further, in FIG. 29A, the fraction per support is the same regardless of the probability set value, but may be different. Further, in FIG. 29 (a), the fraction per support is
The probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game is higher in the low probability state than in the high probability state, but it is the same in the low probability state and the high probability state. It may be possible, and the case of the low probability state may be lower than the case of the high probability state. Further, the distribution rate per support in the high probability state may be set to "0", and the lottery per support may be won only in the low probability state.

FIG. 29B is an example of the jackpot type distribution rate. In FIG. 29 (b), the jackpot type distribution rate is common to the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, but may be different. In addition, FIG.
In 9 (b), the jackpot type distribution rate is the same regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game, but may be different.
FIG. 29 (c) is an example of the fractionation rate of the small hit type. In FIG. 29 (c), the fractionation rate of the small hit type is common to the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, but may be different. In addition, FIG.
In 9 (c), the fraction of the small hit type is the same regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game, but may be different.

FIG. 29 (d) is an example of the parts per support type. In FIG. 29 (d), the parts per support type are the same regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game, but may be different.
Further, in FIG. 29 (d), the distribution rate of C per support in Special Figure 1 is higher than the distribution rate of C per support in Special Figure 2, but it is per support in Special Figure 1. The distribution rate of C may be the same as the distribution rate of C per support in Special Figure 2, or may be lower than the distribution rate of C per support in Special Figure 2. Further, in FIG. 29 (d), the distribution rate of A per support in Special FIG. 1 and the distribution rate of B per support in Special FIG. 1 are the same, but may be different. Further, in FIG. 29 (d), the distribution rate of A per support in the special figure 2 and the distribution rate of B per support in the special figure 2 are the same, but may be different.

Since the flowchart of the main process of the present embodiment is the same as the flowchart of the main process of the first embodiment (FIGS. 7 and 8), the illustration is omitted.
In step X48 of the main process of the present embodiment, the values of predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at power-on are extracted, and the corresponding initial random numbers (in the case of the present embodiment, various initial value random numbers) are extracted. Random numbers that determine the hit symbol of the special symbol (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number), random number that determines the hit of the normal symbol (win random number), random number that determines the support symbol (support symbol random number)
) Is saved in a predetermined area of RWM as an initial value (start value).

In the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the support per symbol random number are configured to be generated by using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock whose speed is equal to or higher than the operating clock of the CPU. It is a "low-speed counter" that is updated based on a CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing) that has the same cycle as timer interrupt processing, which is a processing unit. In addition, for big hit symbol random numbers, small hit symbol random numbers, hit random numbers, and support per symbol random numbers, the so-called "initial value change" is used to change the start value using each initial value random number (generated by software) each time the random number goes around. Method "is adopted. It should be noted that each of the random numbers may be a counter-type update by +1 or -1, or a random-type update in which all the values in the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle is completed. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number updated only by the hardware, and the jackpot symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the support hit symbol random number are random numbers updated by the hardware and software.

Further, since the flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the present embodiment is the same as the flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the first embodiment (FIG. 9), the illustration is omitted.
In the random number update process 1 (step X107) in the timer interrupt process of the present embodiment, the initial values (start) of the large hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the support per symbol random number, which are the targets of the initial value random number update process. Value) is updated.
In the present embodiment, the symbol random number per support is provided, but it is also possible not to provide the symbol random number per support. In that case, the big hit symbol random number may be used to select the support hit symbol from a plurality of types, or the small hit symbol random number may be used to select the support per symbol from a plurality of types. Is also good.

[Game state transition diagram (game flow)]
First, the transition (transition) of the game state by the game control of the game control device 100 will be described. FIG. 30 is a game state transition diagram (game flow) showing the transition of the game state in the present embodiment.
It is a figure exemplifying.
The gaming states include a normal gaming state ST14, a first specific gaming state ST11, a second specific gaming state ST12, and a third specific gaming state ST13. In addition to this, as a gaming state, the first special result (
There are a first special gaming state (big hit gaming state) based on the big hit) and a second special gaming state (small hit gaming state) based on the second special result (small hit), but they are omitted here.

In each game state, the first special result (big hit) that will be controlled by the game control device 100.
The special figure probability from which is derived, the effect mode controlled by the effect control device 300 to determine the effect mode of the game, the main start area which is the start area mainly to be aimed at in the game state, and the special figure variation display game to be mainly executed. The main fluctuation special map, which is the type of, and the launch direction of the game ball are defined.

In the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to aim for a prize in the starting winning opening 36 by hitting the left side, and aiming for a prize in the ordinary variable winning device 37 by hitting the right side. That is, it is possible to select the target starting area according to the player's will. Further, each game state is designed on the assumption that one of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game is mainly played, and the player plays the game according to this design. It is configured so that it is advantageous for the player to proceed mainly with the special figure variation display game, which is determined to be the main in the design so as to proceed. In this specification, one special figure variation display game determined to be the main in each game state may be referred to as a main variation, and the other special figure variation display game may be referred to as an irregular variation.

In the normal game state ST14, the special figure probability is a low probability state, and there is no general electric support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning, and the special figure variable display game or normal Figure Fluctuation display There is no time reduction to shorten the fluctuation time of the game. In addition, the effect mode that defines the effect mode is a normal mode. The main variable special figure is a special figure 1 variable display game, and the main starting area is the starting winning opening 36, and the firing direction is left-handed in order to aim at the starting winning opening 36. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 1 variable display game is the main variation and the special figure 2 variable display game is the irregular variation.

In the first specific game state ST11, the special figure probability is a high probability state, and there is no general electric support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning, and the special figure changing display game. There is no time saving to shorten the fluctuation time of the game. Further, the effect mode that defines the effect mode is a latent mode. The main variable special figure is a special figure 1 variable display game, and the main starting area is the starting winning opening 36, and the firing direction is left-handed in order to aim at the starting winning opening 36. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 1 variable display game is the main variation and the special figure 2 variable display game is the irregular variation.

The second specific game state ST12 is a state in which the special figure probability is high, and there is a general electric support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning. If there is a normal power support, it will be possible to shorten the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game and the normal map fluctuation display game. The effect mode that defines the effect mode is the chance mode. Further, the main variable special figure is a special figure 2 variable display game, the main starting area is the normal variable winning device 37, and the firing direction is right-handed in order to aim at the normal variable winning device 37. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 2 variable display game is the main variation and the special figure 1 variable display game is the irregular variation.
The third specific game state ST13 is the same as the second specific game state ST12 except that the special figure probability is a low probability state.

Of these four gaming states, the normal gaming state ST14 is the most disadvantageous state for the player. The third specific game state ST13 is a state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state ST14 because it has a general electric support, and the first specific game state ST11 is a high probability state and therefore the normal game state ST14 and the third. This is a state more advantageous to the player than the specific game state ST13. The second specific game state ST12 is a high-probability state and has a general electric support, so that it is a state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state ST14, the first specific game state ST11, and the third specific game state ST13.

The transition of the gaming state is the end of the first special gaming state based on the derivation of the first special result (big hit).
It is done by deriving per support and digesting the specified number of games. Therefore, the gaming state does not shift due to the end of the second special gaming state based on the derivation of the second special result (small hit).
Basically, if the special result that triggered the start of the special game state is a normal jackpot that is set to a low probability state after the end of the special game state, the process shifts to the third specific game state ST13, and the special Of the probabilistic jackpots that are set to a high probability state after the end of the gaming state, if the probabilistic jackpot is A jackpot, the second specific gaming state ST12 is entered, and if the probability variation B jackpot is the first specific gaming state ST11. ..

Specifically, when the probability variation A jackpot is derived as a result of the special figure variation display game and the special gaming state is entered, and V is passed in the special gaming state (the specific area of the first special variation winning device 38 (1st special variation winning device 38).
When the game ball flows into the probabilistic operation area) and is detected by the specific area switch 38d), the process shifts to the second specific game state ST12 after the end of the special game state. In addition, as a result of the special figure fluctuation display game, the probability variation B jackpot is derived and becomes a special game state, and V in the special game state.
In the case of passing (when the game ball flows into the specific area (probability variation operation area) of the first special variable winning device 38 and is detected by the specific area switch 38d), the first is after the end of the special game state.
It shifts to the specific game state ST11. In addition, as a result of the special figure variation display game, a normal jackpot is derived and a special game state is set, and when V is not passed in the special game state (a game ball in a specific area (probability variation operation area) of the first special variation winning device 38). If the game does not flow in), the game shifts to the third specific game state ST13 after the end of the special game state. Since the second specific game state ST12 and the third specific game state ST13 have the same chance mode as the effect mode, it is difficult for the player to grasp that the mode has changed.

It should be noted that the number of STs (for example, 20), which is the number of special figure fluctuation display games that can be executed in a high probability state.
00 times) is set, and when the number of executions of the special figure variation display game from the end of the special game state reaches the ST number in the first specific game state ST11, the game shifts to the normal game state ST14. Is also good.
In addition, the number of STs (for example, 20), which is the number of special figure fluctuation display games that can be executed in a high probability state.
00 times) is set, and when the number of executions of the special figure variation display game from the end of the special game state reaches the ST number in the second specific game state ST12, the normal game state ST14 (or the third specific game) is set. The state may be changed to ST13).

When a normal jackpot is derived and the game shifts to the third specific game state ST13, it is possible to stay in the third specific game state ST13 until the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times. When the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times without deriving the big hit or the support hit in the specific game state ST13, the game shifts to the normal game state ST14. That is, in the present embodiment, the number of times the jackpot is normally supported is set to "100 times". The number of times the jackpot is normally supported is not limited to "100 times" and can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, when the probabilistic jackpot A is derived and shifts to the second specific gaming state ST12, 10
It is possible to stay in the second specific game state ST12 until the special figure variation display game of 00 times is executed, and in the second specific game state ST12, the big hit or the support hit is not derived and the special figure of 1000 times is not derived. When the variable display game is executed, the game shifts to the first specific game state ST11. That is, in the present embodiment, the number of times of support for the probability change A jackpot is "1000 times".
Is set to. The number of support times for the probability change A jackpot is not limited to "1000 times".
It can be changed as appropriate, and may be, for example, "until the next big hit or support hit".

Further, as described above, the transition of the gaming state is also performed by the derivation per support.
Specifically, in the normal game state ST14 and the third specific game state ST13, when a support hit is derived as a result of the special figure variation display game, the third specific game state is performed after the end of the special figure variation display game. Move to ST13. Further, in the first specific game state ST11 and the second specific game state ST12, when a support hit is derived as a result of the special figure variation display game, the second specific game state ST12 is performed after the end of the special figure variation display game. Move to. That is, the transition (transition) of the gaming state when the probabilistic jackpot or the normal jackpot is derived goes through the special gaming state, whereas the transition (transition) of the gaming state when the support hit is derived.
Does not go through the special game state. Therefore, for example, when the support hit is derived as a result of the special figure variation display game in the first specific game state ST11 (without high probability support),
After the end of the special figure variation display game, the second specific game state ST does not go through the special game state.
It is possible to shift to 12 (with high probability support).

When A per support is derived and shifts to the third specific game state ST13 (or the second specific game state ST12), the third specific is specified until the special figure variation display game is executed 20 times. It is possible to stay in the game state ST13 (or the second specific game state ST12), and in the third specific game state ST13 (or the second specific game state ST12), no big hit or support hit is derived and 20 times. When the special figure fluctuation display game is executed,
It shifts to the normal game state ST14 (or the first specific game state ST11). That is, in this embodiment, the number of times A is supported per support is set to "20 times". The number of times A is supported per support is not limited to "20 times" and can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, when B per support is derived and shifts to the third specific game state ST13 (or the second specific game state ST12), the first is said until the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times. 3 It is possible to stay in the specific game state ST13 (or the second specific game state ST12), and the third specific game state ST13 (or the second specific game state ST1).
When the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times without deriving the big hit or the support hit in 2), the game shifts to the normal game state ST14 (or the first specific game state ST11). That is, in this embodiment, the number of times B is supported per support is set to "100 times". The number of times B is supported per support is not limited to "100 times" and can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, when C per support is derived and shifts to the third specific game state ST13 (or the second specific game state ST12), the first is said until the special figure variation display game is executed 1000 times. It is possible to stay in the 3 specific game state ST13 (or the 2nd specific game state ST12), and the 3rd specific game state ST13 (or the 2nd specific game state ST12).
When the special figure variation display game is executed 1000 times without deriving the big hit or the support hit in 12), the game shifts to the normal game state ST14 (or the first specific game state ST11). That is, in the present embodiment, the number of times of support of C per support is set to "1000 times". The number of times C is supported per support is not limited to "1000 times" and can be changed as appropriate.

In the present embodiment, the effect (display device 41, etc.) to be executed during the chance mode is used depending on whether the mode is changed to the chance mode via the special gaming state or the chance mode is changed without going through the special gaming state. Production by display, production by sound using speakers 19a, 19b, etc., production by light using frame decoration device 18, board decoration device 46, etc., production by movable members using board production device 44, frame production device, etc. , At least one of) is made to be different. That is, the production mode of the effect executed in the chance mode generated based on the derivation of the big hit (normal big hit, probability variation A big hit) and the support hit (support hits A to C).
) Is different from the production mode of the effect executed in the chance mode, so whether the chance mode is generated based on the derivation of the jackpot depending on the production mode of the effect executed during the chance mode. , It can be suggested whether it was generated based on the derivation per support.

In this embodiment, when the support hit is derived during the chance mode (during the support of the Fuden),
That is, when the support hit is derived in the second specific game state ST12 and the third specific game state ST13, the support number is reset and the support number corresponding to the new support hit is reset.
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 31 (a), the third specific game state ST13 (or the second specific game state ST12) shifted with the end of the special figure variation display game in which the result is “B per support”. ), When A is derived per support at the 10th rotation, the remaining number of support times is changed from 90 times to 20 times.
Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 31 (b), the third specific game state ST13 (or the second specific game state ST1) shifted with the end of the special figure variation display game in which the result is “B per support”.
In 2), when A is derived per support at the 90th rotation, the remaining number of supports is 1.
It is changed from 0 times to 20 times.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect mode is changed in response to the change in the remaining number of times of support. That is, for example, in the example shown in FIG. 31 (a), when the remaining number of times of support is changed from 90 times to 20 times, the effect mode is changed from chance mode B (chance mode corresponding to B per support) to another. Chance mode (chance mode A (chance mode corresponding to A per support), or chance mode different from chance mode A and chance mode B)
Switch to. Further, for example, in the example shown in FIG. 31 (b), the remaining number of times of support is 1.
When the number of times is changed from 0 to 20 times, the production mode is switched from the chance mode B to another chance mode.

It is not necessary to change the production mode in response to the change in the remaining number of times of support. Specifically, for example, in the example shown in FIG. 31, chance mode B may be continued even after the remaining number of times of support is changed to 20 times.
Further, it is possible to allow only the rank up of the effect mode and not to switch the effect mode to lower the rank. Specifically, for example, when the support hit derived after the support hit B is the support hit C, the production mode is switched from the chance mode B to the chance mode C (chance mode corresponding to the support hit C). As shown in FIG. 31, when the support hit derived after the support hit B is the support hit A, switching the production mode from the chance mode B to the chance mode A lowers the rank, so the remaining number of support times. The chance mode B may be continued (or switched to a chance mode different from the chance mode A or the chance mode B) even after the change is made.

Alternatively, when a support hit is derived during the chance mode (during Fuden support), the support count corresponding to the new support hit may be added to the remaining support counts.
Specifically, for example, as shown in the left figure of FIG. 32 (a), the third specific game state ST13 (or the second specific) shifted with the end of the special figure variation display game in which the result is “B per support”. In the game state ST12), when A per support is derived at the 10th rotation, the remaining number of support times is changed from 90 times to 110 times (= 90 times + 20 times), and for example, FIG. 32.
As shown in the right figure of (a), in the third specific game state ST13 (or the second specific game state ST12), which has shifted with the end of the special figure variation display game in which the result is “B per support”.
When A per support is derived at the 90th rotation, the remaining number of support times may be changed from 10 times to 30 times (= 10 times + 20 times).

In this case, an upper limit number of times (for example, 1000 times) is set for the number of support times, and if the sum of the remaining number of support times and the number of support times corresponding to a new support exceeds the upper limit number of times, the remaining number of support times is set. It may be changed to the upper limit number of times. Further, in this case, the effect mode may or may not be changed in response to the change in the remaining number of times of support. That is, for example, in the example shown in FIG. 32 (a), when the remaining number of times of support is changed, the effect mode may be switched from the chance mode B to another chance mode.
Chance mode B may continue even after the remaining number of supports has been changed. Further, it is possible to allow only the rank up of the effect mode and not to switch the effect mode to lower the rank.

Alternatively, when a support hit is derived during the chance mode (during Fuden support), the remaining number of supports is compared with the number of supports corresponding to a new support hit, which is more advantageous (advantageous for the player). One) may be adopted. Specifically, for example, as shown in the left figure of FIG. 32 (b), the third specific game state ST13 (or the second specific) shifted with the end of the special figure variation display game in which the result is “B per support”. In the game state ST12), when A per support is derived at the 10th rotation, the number of support times corresponding to a new support hit is 20 times, which is less than the remaining number of support times (90 times), so the remaining number of times. While the number of times of support is not changed, for example, as shown in the right figure of FIG. 32 (b), the third specific game state ST13 (or the third specific game state ST13 (or) shifted with the end of the special figure variation display game in which the result is “B per support” In the second specific game state ST12), when A per support is derived at the 90th rotation, the number of support times corresponding to a new support hit is 20 times, which is larger than the remaining number of support times (10 times). Therefore, the remaining number of times of support may be changed from 10 times to 20 times.

In this case, the effect mode may or may not be changed in response to the change in the remaining number of times of support. That is, for example, in the example shown on the right side of FIG. 32 (b), when the remaining number of times of support is changed, the effect mode may be switched from the chance mode B to another chance mode, or the remaining number of times of support may be switched. The chance mode B may be continued even after the change is made. Further, it is possible to allow only the rank up of the effect mode and not to switch the effect mode to lower the rank.

In the present embodiment, the effect performed during the execution of the support hit game (special figure variation display game whose result is "support hit") is a special effect (described later) such as a battle effect.
The larger of the remaining number of support times and the number of support times corresponding to a new support (
In the game machine 10 having a configuration that employs the player's advantage (that is, the game machine 10 that performs the control shown in FIG. 32 (b)), the support hit game (for example, FIG. 32 (b)) in which the number of times of support is adopted is adopted. The special effect is performed only during the execution of the special figure variation display game in which the result in the right figure of) is "A per support", and the support number is not adopted in the support game (for example, FIG. 32 (b)).
The special effect may not be performed during the execution of the special figure variation display game) in which the result in the left figure of) is "A per support".
Since the variation pattern per support selected when the result is "per support" is a variation pattern considering executing a special effect during the game per support, the special effect is executed during the game per support. If this is not the case, it is better to make adjustments by lengthening the temporary stop display time of the game result as compared with the case of executing the special effect.

Further, in the example shown in the left figure of FIG. 32 (b), as a result of the support hit game in which the support count is not adopted, the support hit symbol (here, the support hit symbol A) is stopped and displayed. Not limited. For example, as a result of the support hit game in which the support count is not adopted, the out-of-support symbol may be stopped and displayed instead of the support hit symbol. In the game machine 10 having a configuration in which the larger number of the remaining number of times of support and the number of times of support corresponding to the new support hit (the one that is advantageous for the player) is adopted, the effect control device 300 is the game control device 100.
Based on the command transmitted from, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the game control device 100 does not adopt the support number corresponding to the new support hit. Specifically, the effect control device 300
For example, the number of times of support based on the decorative special figure command for notifying the stop symbol on the display device 41 and the number of times of support based on the time reduction fluctuation number command for notifying the time reduction fluctuation number (support number). In comparison, if they are different, it is determined that the game control device 100 has determined not to adopt the support number corresponding to the new support. Then, when it is determined that the game control device 100 does not adopt the support number corresponding to the new support hit, as a result of the support hit game, the symbol designated by the decoration special figure command (the new support hit). The out-of-order symbol may be stopped and displayed instead of the corresponding symbol per support).

In the examples shown in FIGS. 31 and 32, the support hit derived during the chance mode (during the normal power support) is the support hit A, but the present invention is not limited thereto. That is, A per support may be derived during the chance mode, B per support may be derived during the chance mode, and C per support may be derived during the chance mode.

Here, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern per support selected when the result is "per support" is the SP reach among the variation patterns selected when the result is "big hit" or "missing". Is the same as the fluctuation pattern in which. That is, SP reach is generated in the support game. Further, in the present embodiment, when the result is a special figure variation display game other than "per support" and the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is a variation pattern in which SP reach occurs, the special figure variation display game is used. It is possible to execute special effects (described later) such as battle effects even while the figure variation display game is being executed.
It should be noted that special effects such as battle effects (described later) may be executed even during execution of the special figure variation display game in which SP reach does not occur. In addition, special effects such as battle effects (described later) may be dedicated to the support hit game, and may not be executed during the execution of the special figure variation display game in which the result is "big hit" or "missing". ..

Further, the fluctuation pattern per support may be the same as the fluctuation pattern in which SP reach does not occur among the fluctuation patterns selected when the result is "big hit" or "missing".
It may be a variable pattern dedicated to the game per support.
For example, when not in the chance mode, a fluctuation pattern dedicated to the support hit game is selected, and when in the chance mode, a fluctuation pattern that is also used as a special figure fluctuation display game other than the support hit game (for example, the result is Of the fluctuation patterns selected when "big hit" or "missing" occurs, the fluctuation pattern in which SP reach occurs) is selected so that the dedicated fluctuation pattern has a longer fluctuation time than the dual-purpose fluctuation pattern. May be set as a fluctuation pattern. As a result, the fluctuation time of the game per support executed when not in chance mode is longer than the fluctuation time of the game per support executed when in chance mode, so that it is executed when not in chance mode. It is possible to reliably execute mode selection, effect explanation, etc. related to the chance mode (second specific game state ST12, third specific game state ST13) during the fluctuation time of the game per support, and at the start of the chance mode. It is possible to have a connection with the effect to be executed (fanfare effect, etc.).

Alternatively, the stop display time of the game per support may be longer than the stop display time of the special figure variation display game other than the game per support. As a result, during the stop display time of the game per support, it is possible to reliably execute the mode selection and the effect explanation related to the chance mode, so that the effect (fanfare effect, etc.) executed at the start of the chance mode Can have a connection.

Alternatively, as the fluctuation pattern of the first special figure fluctuation display game after shifting to the chance mode, a fluctuation pattern having a relatively long fluctuation time may be selected. Specifically, for example
When the result of the first special figure fluctuation display game is "missing" after shifting to the chance mode, the fluctuation pattern selected when the result is "missing" as the fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game Of these, a fluctuation pattern having a relatively long fluctuation time, or a fluctuation pattern dedicated to the first special figure fluctuation display game may be selected by shifting to the chance mode. As a result, it is possible to reliably execute the mode selection, the effect explanation, and the like related to the chance mode at the start of the chance mode. In addition, this makes it possible to store the second start memory by the time the first special figure variation display game ends in the chance mode. Since the game machine 10 of the present embodiment is a game machine that executes the special figure 2 variable display game with priority over the special figure 1 variable display game, the chance mode is set and the first special figure variable display game ends. By generating the second start memory by, the main fluctuation next to the first special figure fluctuation display game (
It is possible to execute the special figure 2 variable display game), and the game can be advanced in an advantageous manner for the player.

Hereinafter, control of the gaming machine of the present embodiment will be described.
As described above, the flowchart of the main process of the present embodiment is the same as the flowchart of the main process of the first embodiment (FIGS. 7 and 8), and thus the illustration is omitted. Further, since the flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the present embodiment is the same as the flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the first embodiment (FIG. 9), the illustration is omitted.

[Hard random number acquisition process]
FIG. 33 shows a hard random number acquisition process (steps A102, A110) in the start port switch monitoring process of the present embodiment. Since the flowchart of the start port switch monitoring process of the present embodiment is the same as the flowchart of the start port switch monitoring process of the first embodiment (FIG. 11), the illustration is omitted.
In this hard random number acquisition process, first, among the first starting port (first starting winning opening 36) and the second starting opening (normal variable winning device 37), the non-winning information of the starting port to be monitored is set ( Step A121), among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A122).
Then, when there is no input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A122; N), the hard random number acquisition process ends. On the other hand, when there is an input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A122; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A123).
, It is determined whether or not there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124).

If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; N), that is, if no random number has been extracted, the hard random number acquisition process ends.
When there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; Y).
Loads and prepares the extracted jackpot random numbers in the hard random number latch register to be monitored (step A125). Then, among the first starting port (first starting winning opening 36) and the second starting opening (normal variable winning device 37), the winning information of the starting port to be monitored is set (step A).
126), the hard random number acquisition process is terminated.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
In the present embodiment, the game control device 100 executes the special figure start port switch common process shown in FIG. 34 instead of the special figure start port switch common process shown in FIG. In this special figure start port switch common process, after the process of step A144 is performed, a symbol random number per support is extracted and prepared (step A149a), and the prepared symbol random number per support is stored in the symbol random number storage area per support of the RWM. After performing the saving process (step A149b), the process proceeds to the process of step A145.

[Special figure reservation information judgment processing]
In the present embodiment, the game control device 100 executes the special figure reservation information determination process shown in FIG. 35 instead of the special figure reservation information determination process shown in FIG. In this special figure reservation information judgment process,
When the determination result is not a small hit (step A160; N), a support hit determination process (step A151a) is performed to determine whether or not the jackpot random value is a support hit depending on whether or not it matches the support hit determination value. .. Then, when the determination result is not a support hit (step A151b; N).
) Sets the out-of-order stop symbol information (step A163), and proceeds to the process of step A164.
On the other hand, when the determination result is a support hit (step A151b; Y), a support hit symbol random number check table is set (step A151c), and the support hit symbol prepared in step A149a of the special figure start port switch common process is set. Get the stop symbol information corresponding to the random number (
Step A151d), the process proceeds to step A164.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
FIG. 36A shows the jackpot flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process of the present embodiment (
Step A322) is shown. Since the flowchart of the special figure 1 variation start process of the present embodiment is the same as the flowchart of the special figure 1 variation start process of the first embodiment (FIG. 15 (a)), the illustration is omitted.
In this big hit flag 1 setting process, first, the big hit flag 1 area, the small hit flag 1 area,
The information is saved in the support flag 1 area (step A361). Next, the jackpot random number is loaded and prepared from the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of RWM (step A362), and the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (for the number of hold 1). Step A36
3). The number of hold 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1).

After that, a jackpot determination process (step A364) for determining whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot is performed according to whether or not the acquired jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value. Then, when the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step A364) is a jackpot (step A365; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 1 area where the loss information was saved in step A361 (step A366). ), The jackpot flag 1 setting process is completed. On the other hand, when the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step A364) is not a jackpot (step A365; N),
A small hit determination process (step A367) is performed to determine whether or not the acquired large hit random number value is a small hit depending on whether or not it matches the small hit determination value.

Then, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step A367) is a small hit (step A368; Y), the small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag 1 area where the loss information is saved in step A361. Then (step A369), the jackpot flag 1 setting process is completed. On the other hand, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step A367) is not a small hit (step A368; N), is it a support hit depending on whether or not the acquired jackpot random value matches the support hit determination value? A support hit determination process (step A370) for determining whether or not to perform is performed.

Then, when the determination result of the support hit determination process (step A370) is the support hit (step A371; Y), the support hit flag 1 area where the loss information was saved in step A361 is overwritten and saved. (Step A372), the jackpot flag 1 setting process is completed. On the other hand, when the determination result of the support hit determination process (step A370) is not the support hit (step A371; N), the jackpot flag 1 setting process ends. In this case, the loss information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area, the small hit flag 1 area, and the support hit flag 1 area.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
FIG. 36 (b) shows the jackpot flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process of the present embodiment (
Step A342) is shown. Since the flowchart of the special figure 2 variation start process of the present embodiment is the same as the flowchart of the special figure 2 variation start process of the first embodiment (FIG. 15 (b)), the illustration is omitted.
In this big hit flag 2 setting process, first, the big hit flag 2 area, the small hit flag 2 area,
The information is saved in the support flag 2 area (step A381). Next, the jackpot random number is loaded and prepared from the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of RWM (step A382), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (for the number of hold 1). Step A38
3). The number of hold 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 2).

After that, a jackpot determination process (step A384) for determining whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot is performed according to whether or not the acquired jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value. Then, when the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step A384) is a jackpot (step A385; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 2 area where the loss information was saved in step A381 (step A386). ), The jackpot flag 2 setting process is completed. On the other hand, when the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step A384) is not a jackpot (step A385; N),
A small hit determination process (step A387) is performed to determine whether or not the acquired large hit random number value is a small hit depending on whether or not it matches the small hit determination value.

Then, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step A387) is a small hit (step A388; Y), the small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step A381. Then (step A389), the jackpot flag 2 setting process is completed. On the other hand, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step A387) is not a small hit (step A388; N), whether the acquired large hit random number value is a support hit depending on whether or not it matches the support hit determination value. A support hit determination process (step A390) for determining whether or not to perform is performed.

Then, when the determination result of the support hit determination process (step A390) is the support hit (step A391; Y), the support hit flag 2 area where the loss information was saved in step A381 is overwritten with the support hit information and saved. (Step A392), the jackpot flag 2 setting process is completed. On the other hand, when the determination result of the support hit determination process (step A390) is not the support hit (step A391; N), the jackpot flag 2 setting process ends. In this case, the loss information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area, the small hit flag 2 area, and the support hit flag 2 area.

[Big hit judgment process]
FIG. 37A shows the jackpot determination process (steps A364 and A384) in the jackpot flag 1 setting process and the jackpot flag 2 setting process described above. In this jackpot determination process, first, the upper limit determination value table corresponding to the probability setting value is set (step A401). The upper limit judgment value table is provided for each probability setting value, and the upper limit judgment value in the high probability state and the upper limit judgment value in the low probability state (normal probability state) are defined respectively. Here, the corresponding table is set according to the currently set probability setting value.
The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value. , It is judged to be a big hit. By setting the upper limit judgment value table corresponding to the probability set value, the jackpot judgment can be performed with the probability value corresponding to the probability set value.

Next, the lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value is set (step A402), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A403). Here, the value of the lower limit judgment value is the same value regardless of the probability setting value or the probability state (high probability state or normal probability state).
The lower limit judgment value may be different depending on the probability setting value and the probability state. In this case, as with the upper limit judgment value, the lower limit judgment value table in which the lower limit judgment value is defined for each probability setting value is selected according to the probability setting value, and the lower limit judgment value to be used is selected according to the probability state. To set. Of course, the upper limit judgment value table and the lower limit judgment value table may be combined into a judgment value table.

When the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A403; Y), that is, when it is not a jackpot, a deviation is set as the determination result (step A408), and the jackpot determination process is terminated. In addition, the loss as a judgment result indicates that the lottery for the big hit has been missed. When the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step A403).
N) determines whether the state is in a high probability state (step A404). Then, in the case of the high probability state (step A404; Y), the upper limit determination value in the high probability is set (step A40).
5), it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A407).
.. If the probability is not high (step A404; N), the upper limit determination value in the low probability is set (step A406), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A407). .. The upper limit determination value set here is acquired by referring to the upper limit determination value table set in step A401 described above.

If the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A407; Y), that is, if it is not a jackpot, a deviation is set as the determination result (step A408), and the jackpot determination process is terminated. Also, when the value of the jackpot random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step A407).
N), that is, if it is a big hit, a big hit is set as a judgment result (step A40).
9), the jackpot determination process is completed.

[Small hit judgment processing]
FIG. 37B shows the small hit determination process (steps A367 and A387) in the above-mentioned big hit flag 1 setting process and big hit flag 2 setting process. In this small hit determination process, first, the small hit upper limit determination value corresponding to the probability setting value is set (step A411). The small hit upper limit determination value is provided for each probability set value. Moreover, the small hit probability is constant regardless of whether or not it is in a high probability state. In addition, the range of the jackpot determination value and the range of the small hit determination value in the same probability set value do not overlap. The range of the big hit judgment value and the range of the small hit judgment value between different probability setting values may overlap, but may not overlap.

The small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is equal to or higher than the small hit lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit upper limit is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. If it is less than or equal to the judgment value, it is judged to be a small hit. By setting the small hit upper limit judgment value corresponding to the probability set value, the small hit judgment can be performed with the probability value corresponding to the probability set value.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A412).
). When the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A412; Y)
That is, if it is not a small hit, a deviation is set as a judgment result (step A414), and
The small hit determination process ends. In addition, the loss as a judgment result indicates that the lottery for small hits has been missed. When the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A412; N), it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step A413).

If the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step A413; Y), that is, if it is not a small hit, a deviation is set as the determination result (step A414), and the small hit determination process is terminated. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step A413; N), that is, if it is a small hit, a small hit is set as the determination result (step A415), and the small hit determination process is completed. To do.

[Support hit judgment processing]
FIG. 38 shows the support hit determination process (steps A370, A390) in the above-mentioned jackpot flag 1 setting process and jackpot flag 2 setting process. In this support hit judgment process, first
The upper limit determination value table per support corresponding to the probability set value is set (step A421). The upper limit judgment value table per support is provided for each probability setting value, and the upper limit judgment value per support in the high probability state and the upper limit judgment value per support in the low probability state (normal probability state) are defined respectively. .. Here, the corresponding table is set according to the currently set probability setting value.

The probability of winning the lottery per support may be different or the same for each probability set value. When different for each probability set value, for example, the lower the probability set value, the easier it is to win the lottery per support (that is, setting 1 is the easiest to win and setting 6 is the most difficult to win). Is good, and vice versa. In addition, the probability of winning the lottery per support may be different or the same for each jackpot probability state. When differentiating each jackpot probability state, for example, the low probability state (normal probability state) may be easier to win than the high probability state, or vice versa. .. In addition, it may be possible to win only when the probability is low. Further, the probability of winning the lottery per support may be different between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.
Further, the range of the big hit judgment value, the range of the small hit judgment value, and the range of the support hit judgment value in the same probability set value are not overlapped. The range of the big hit judgment value, the range of the small hit judgment value, and the range of the support hit judgment value between different probability setting values may overlap, but may not overlap.

In addition, "per support" means that the big hit random number matches the judgment value per support. The support hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the support lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the support hit judgment value, and is the upper limit value of the support hit judgment value. If it is less than or equal to the judgment value, it is judged to be a support hit. By setting the upper limit judgment value table for support corresponding to the probability set value, the support hit judgment can be performed with the probability value corresponding to the probability set value.

Next, the lower limit determination value of the support hit determination value is set (step A422), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the support lower limit determination value (step A423). Here, the value of the lower limit judgment value per support is the same regardless of the probability setting value or the probability state (high probability state or normal probability state), but the lower limit judgment value per support depends on the probability setting value or the probability state. May be different. In this case, as with the upper limit judgment value per support, the lower limit judgment value table per support, in which the lower limit judgment value per support is defined for each probability setting value, is selected according to the probability setting value and used according to the probability state. Select and set the lower limit judgment value per support. Of course, the upper limit judgment value table per support and the lower limit judgment value table per support may be collectively used as the judgment value table per support.

When the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value per support (step A423; Y)
That is, if it is not a support hit, a deviation is set as a judgment result (step A428).
, Ends the support hit determination process. In addition, the loss as a judgment result indicates that the lottery for each support has been missed. Further, when the value of the target jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit determination value per support (step A423; N), it is determined whether or not it is in a high probability state (step A4).
24). Then, in the case of the high probability state (step A424; Y), the upper limit judgment value per support during the high probability is set (step A425), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value per support. (Step A427). If the probability is not high (step A424; N), the upper limit determination value per support during the low probability is set (step A426), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value per support. (Step A427)
.. The upper limit determination value per support set here is acquired by referring to the upper limit determination value table per support set in step A421 described above.

When the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value per support (step A427; Y)
That is, if it is not a support hit, a deviation is set as a judgment result (step A428).
, End the jackpot determination process. Further, when the value of the target jackpot random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value per support (step A427; N), that is, when it is a support hit, the support hit is set as the determination result (step A429), and the support hit determination process is performed. To finish.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 39 shows a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A323) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process of the present embodiment. The flowchart of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing of the present embodiment is the first.
Since it is the same as the flowchart of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing of the embodiment (FIG. 15A), the illustration is omitted.
In this special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A431), and if it is a big hit (step A431; Y), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (holding number 1). Load the jackpot symbol random number from (for) (step A432). Next, the special figure 1 jackpot symbol table is set (step A433), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A434).
). The jackpot type is selected by this process.

After that, the special figure 1 jackpot stop symbol information table is set (step A435), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A436). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the special diagram 1 display 51) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (step A437), and the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and the time reduction determination data is obtained. It is saved in the area (step A438), and the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state is saved (step A439). This information is for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state and the effect mode after the end of the special gaming state. And
A decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A455).

On the other hand, when the big hit 1 flag is not a big hit (step A431; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step A440), and when it is a small hit (step A44).
0; Y) loads the small hit symbol random number from the special figure 1 small hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) (step A441). Next, the special figure 1 small hit symbol table is set (step A44).
2), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A443). The small hit type is selected by this process. After that, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A444), the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (step A445), and the stop symbol pattern is created. Prepare the corresponding decorative special drawing command (step A455).

If the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step A440; N), it is determined whether the support hit flag 1 is a support hit (step A446), and if it is a support hit (step A44).
6; Y) loads the symbol random number per support from the special figure 1 support symbol random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (step A447). Next, the special figure 1 support per symbol table is set (step A448), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded support per support symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A449). By this process, the type per support is selected.

After that, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A450), and the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the time reduction determination data area (step A450). Step A451), the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (step A452), and the decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A455).
If the support hit flag 1 is not a support hit (step A446; N), the stop symbol number at the time of disconnection is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A453), and the disengagement stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area. Save to (step A454) and prepare a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step A455). By the above processing
A stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, save the decorative special figure command in the decorative special figure command area (step A456),
The effect command setting process (step A457) is performed. This decorative special figure command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A458), the special figure 1 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (step A459), and the special figure 1 small hit symbol random number storage area (number of holds 1)
(For step A460) is cleared to 0 (step A460), the symbol random number storage area (for the number of holdings 1) per special figure 1 support is cleared to 0 (step A461), and the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is completed.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 40 shows a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process of the present embodiment. The special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is the same process as the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process for the special figure 2. Since the flowchart of the special figure 2 variation start process of the present embodiment is the same as the flowchart of the special figure 2 variation start process of the first embodiment (FIG. 15 (b)), the illustration is omitted.
In this special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A471), and if it is a big hit (step A471; Y), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (holding number 1). Load the jackpot symbol random number from (for) (step A472). Next, the special figure 2 jackpot symbol table is set (step A473), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step A474).
). The jackpot type is selected by this process.

After that, the special figure 2 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step A475), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A476). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the special diagram 2 display 52) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (step A477), and the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and the time reduction determination data is obtained. It is saved in the area (step A478), and the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state is saved (step A479). This information is for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state and the effect mode after the end of the special gaming state. And
A decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A495).

On the other hand, when the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (step A471; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step A480), and when it is a small hit (step A48).
0; Y) loads the small hit symbol random number from the special figure 2 small hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) (step A481). Next, the special figure 2 small hit symbol table is set (step A48).
2), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step A483). The small hit type is selected by this process. After that, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A484), the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (step A485), and the stop symbol pattern is created. Prepare the corresponding decorative special drawing command (step A495).

If the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step A480; N), it is determined whether the support hit flag 2 is a support hit (step A486), and if it is a support hit (step A48).
6; Y) loads the symbol random number per support from the special figure 2 support symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) (step A487). Next, the special figure 2 support per symbol table is set (step A488), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded support per support symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step A489). By this process, the type per support is selected.

After that, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A490), and the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the time reduction determination data area (step A490). Step A491), the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (step A492), and the decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A495).
If the support hit flag 2 is not a support hit (step A486; N), the stop symbol number at the time of disconnection is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step A493), and the disengagement stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area. Save to (step A494) and prepare a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step A495). By the above processing
A stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decorative special figure command is saved in the decorative special figure command area (step A496).
The effect command setting process (step A497) is performed. This decorative special figure command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A498), the special figure 2 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (step A499), and the special figure 2 Small hit symbol random number storage area (holding number 1)
(For step A500) is cleared to 0 (for step A500), the symbol random number storage area (for the number of holdings 1) per special figure 2 support is cleared to 0 (step A501), and the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is completed.

[Processing during special figure fluctuation]
FIG. 41 shows a special figure changing process (step A10) in the special figure game process of the present embodiment. Since the flowchart of the special figure game processing of the present embodiment is the same as the flowchart of the special figure game processing of the first embodiment (FIG. 10), the illustration is omitted.
In this special symbol changing process, first, a symbol stop command corresponding to the variable symbol determination flag is prepared (step A601), and an effect command setting process (step A602) is performed. Next, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step A603), and the set display time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A604). In the case of the present embodiment, when the stop symbol pattern is an out-of-order symbol pattern, the display time is set to 600 msec, and when the stop symbol pattern is a jackpot symbol pattern, the display time is 600 m.
Set seconds, and if the stop symbol pattern is a small hit symbol pattern, the display time is 60.
0 msec is set, and when the stop symbol pattern is a symbol pattern per support, 600 msec is set as the display time. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a stop display time setting means for setting a stop display time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

Then, as the processing number, "2" related to the processing during display of the special figure is set (step A605).
, The processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A606). further,
The signal relating to the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 (for example, turning off the signal during the fluctuation of the special symbol 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A607), and the signal relating to the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 (for example, during the fluctuation of the special symbol 2) is saved. Save (Turn off signal) to the test signal output data area (Step A)
608), the number of times the symbol is fixed related to the number of times the special figure variation display game for output is executed to the external information terminal The initial value of the control timer (for example, 256 ms) is saved in the signal control timer area (step A).
609). After that, as information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game on the special figure 1 display 51, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the special figure 1 display 51 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A610). ), As information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game on the special figure 2 display 52, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step). A611), the processing during the special figure change is completed.

[Processing during special figure display]
42 and 43 show a special figure display process (step A11) in the special figure game process of the present embodiment. Since the flowchart of the special figure game processing of the present embodiment is the same as the flowchart of the special figure game processing of the first embodiment (FIG. 10), the illustration is omitted.
In this special figure display processing, first, the support hit flag 1 set in the jackpot flag 1 setting process and the support hit flag 2 set in the jackpot flag 2 setting process are loaded (step A701). , RWM clears the support per flag 1 area and the support per flag 2 area (step A702).
Next, the small hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process and the small hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process are loaded (step A703), and the small hit flag 1 area of the RWM is loaded. And the small hit flag 2 area is cleared (step A704).

Next, the jackpot flag 1 set in the jackpot flag 1 setting process and the jackpot flag 2 set in the jackpot flag 2 setting process are loaded (step A705), and the jackpot flag 1 area and the jackpot flag of the RWM are loaded. Clear two regions (step A706). Then, it is determined whether the loaded jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (step A707), and if it is a jackpot (step A707; Y), the jackpot of the second special figure variation display game (special figure 2 jackpot).
The test signal related to the start of (for example, the condition device operating signal is ON, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal is ON, and the special symbol 2 hit signal is ON) is saved in the RWM test signal output data area (step A710). ), Set the round number upper limit table (step A711).

On the other hand, when the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (step A707; N), it is determined whether the loaded jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (step A708), and when it is a jackpot (step A708; Y), the first special feature. The test signal (for example, the condition device operating signal ON, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal ON, the special symbol 1 per unit signal ON) regarding the start of the jackpot (special figure 1 jackpot) of the figure variation display game is set to RWM. Save to the test signal output data area (step A)
709), the number of rounds upper limit table is set (step A711).

Next, the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit value information (in the case of this embodiment, "1"
0 ”,“ 7 ”or“ 2 ”) is acquired and saved in the RWM round number upper limit area (step A712). Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A713).

Next, the decoration special drawing command is loaded from the decoration special drawing command area of the RWM, prepared (step A714), and the effect command setting process (step A715) is performed. After that, a probability information command related to the information that sets the probability of a hit result in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game to the normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step A716), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step A717) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A718), and the effect command setting process (step). A719) is performed. This fanfare command forms the special game state start information transmitted to the effect control device 300 at the start of the special game state.

Next, the large winning opening opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of winning in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A720). In the case of the present embodiment, in step A720, two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved as signals corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of probability. In addition, each ON / OFF is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. For example, the big hit 2 signal is O when it is a big hit with a ball (the big winning opening opening information is other than the big winning opening opening information 1).
N, a big hit with no balls (so-called sudden big hit, etc. The big winning opening opening information is the big winning opening opening information 1
), It turns ON if it is a big hit in the time saving state, and turns OFF otherwise.
Further, the big hit 3 signal is ON when it is a big hit with a ball, and is OFF when it is a big hit without a ball.

After that, the big winning opening opening information and the big hit fanfare time corresponding to the state of the probability of winning in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game are set (step A721).
), The set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A722). Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A723). As a result, information on the probability state and time saving state of the special figure when a special result occurs is stored. Then, the effect mode after the end of the special game state is determined based on the information stored later.

Then, clear the area of the number of illegal prizes in the large prize opening corresponding to the information on opening the large prize opening (
Step A724), save the fraudulent monitoring period out-of-period flag in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area of the large winning opening corresponding to the large winning opening opening information (step A725). After that, the fanfare / interval processing transition setting process 1 (step A726) for shifting to the fanfare / interval processing is performed, and the special figure display processing is terminated. That is, based on the result of the game control device 100 being a special result in either the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game, the first special variation winning device 38 or the second special variation winning device 38 or the second special variation winning. It serves as a special game state generating means for generating a special game state that converts the device 39 into an open state.

On the other hand, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A708; N), it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step A727), and when it is a small hit (step A727; Y), The test signal (for example, turning on the special symbol 2 small hit signal) regarding the start of the small hit (special figure 2 small hit) of the second special figure variation display game is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A730). , Perform the time reduction variation number update process (step A731)
).
If the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step A727; N), it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step A728), and if it is a small hit (step A728; Y). Saves the test signal (for example, turning on the special symbol 1 small hit signal) regarding the start of the small hit (special figure 1 small hit) of the first special figure variation display game in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step). A729), the time reduction variation number update process is performed (step A731).
).

Next, the effect mode information check process related to the effect mode setting (step A732).
To determine whether the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (step A).
733).
If the special figure is not in high probability (step A733; N), load the decorative special figure command from the decorative special figure command area, prepare it (step A734), and perform the effect command setting process (step A734).
Step A735) is performed. Next, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step A736), an effect command setting process (step A737) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A738. This small hit fanfare command also forms special game state start information transmitted to the effect control device 300 at the start of the special game state.

Further, when the probability of the special figure is high (step A733; Y), the process proceeds to step A738. As described above, in the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state, the large winning opening is opened by the occurrence of a small hit, but the occurrence of a small hit is a game. The screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed so as not to make the person aware of it.
Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A738), and the small hit fanfare middle process transition setting process (step) for shifting to the small hit fanfare middle process. A739) is performed to end the processing during display of the special figure.

On the other hand, when the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step A728; N), it is determined whether the loaded support hit flag 2 is a support hit (step A740). If it is a support (
In step A740; Y), the support operation setting process (step A742) is performed, the special figure normal process transition setting process (step A743) for shifting to the special figure normal process is performed, and the special figure display process is terminated. ..
When the support hit flag 2 is not a support hit (step A740; N), it is determined whether the loaded support hit flag 1 is a support hit (step A741). In the case of hitting the support (step A741; Y), the support operation setting process (step A742) is performed, and the special figure normal process transition setting process (step A743) for shifting to the special figure normal process is performed, and the special figure is performed. Ends the process being displayed.

If the support hit flag 1 is not a support hit (step A741; N), the time reduction variation number update process (step A744) is performed. Then, the effect mode information check process (step A745) related to the setting of the effect mode is performed, the remaining rotation speed for switching preparation corresponding to the effect mode number is set (step A746), and the remaining rotation speed for effect and the remaining rotation speed for switching preparation are used. Is determined (step A747). The remaining rotation speed for switching preparation may be a different value (rotation speed) in all the production modes among the plurality of production modes, or the same value in any of the plurality of production modes. It may be (rotation speed), or it may be the same value (rotation speed) in all the production modes among the plurality of production modes.
If the remaining rotation speeds for the effect and the remaining rotation speeds for switching preparation do not match (step A747; N), the special figure normal processing transition setting process (step A750) for shifting to the special figure normal processing is performed to display the special figure. End the middle process.

On the other hand, when the production remaining rotation speed and the switching preparation remaining rotation speed match (step A747; Y).
) Prepares the effect mode switching preparation command (step A748), performs the effect command setting process (step A749), and performs the special figure normal process transition setting process (step A750) for shifting to the special figure normal process. , Ends the processing while displaying the special figure. The effect mode switching preparation command is a command for preventing the pre-reading effect from being performed several rotations before the effect mode is switched. By transmitting the effect mode switching preparation command to the effect control device 300, the effect is produced across modes. It is possible to prevent contradictions and the like from occurring.

[Time reduction fluctuation frequency update process]
FIG. 44 shows a time reduction variation number update process (step A73) in the above-mentioned special figure display process.
1, A744) is shown. In this time reduction fluctuation number update process, first, it is determined whether or not the normal power supply is being supported (step A751). And if you are not in the support of Fuden (step A)
751; N) ends the time reduction variation number update process. In addition, when the normal electric power support is in progress (step A751; Y), the number of time reduction fluctuations is updated by -1 (step A752).
, It is determined whether the number of time reduction fluctuations has become "0" (step A753).

If the number of time reduction fluctuations is not "0" (step A753; N), the time reduction fluctuation number update process is terminated. Further, when the number of time reduction fluctuations becomes "0" (step A75).
In 3; Y), a signal relating to the end of the time reduction (for example, turning off the jackpot 2 signal) is saved in the external information output data area (step A754). Next, a signal relating to the end of the time reduction (for example, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal is turned off, and the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal is OF
F, the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned off, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal is turned off, and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A755).

Next, the number without time reduction is saved in the game status display number area (step A756), and the normal figure low probability & no time reduction flag is saved in the normal figure game mode flag area (step A75).
7) Save the special figure low probability & no time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (step A758). Next, the signal related to the left-handed instruction (for example, the launch position designation signal 1 is turned off).
) Is saved in the test signal output data area (step A759), and the right-handed display LED (
For example, in order to turn off the first game state display unit 56a), the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A760), and the time reduction variation number update process is completed.

[Production mode information check processing]
FIG. 45 shows the effect mode information check process (step A7) in the above-mentioned special figure display process.
32, A745) is shown. In this effect mode information check process, first, it is determined whether the next mode transition information is a non-update code (step A771). If the next mode transition information is a non-update code (step A771; Y), the effect mode information check process ends. In this case, the effect mode is not changed according to the number of times the special figure variation display game is executed, and the effect mode that continues until the next big hit is selected in a high probability state, for example. ..

If the next mode transition information is not a non-update code (step A771; N), the remaining rotation speed of the effect, which is the number of times the special figure variation display game can be executed until the effect mode is changed, is updated by -1 (step A772). , Judge whether the remaining number of rotations of the effect is "0" (step A)
773). If the remaining rotation speed of the effect is not "0" (step A773; N), the effect mode information check process ends. Further, when the remaining rotation speed of the effect becomes "0" (step A773; Y), that is, when the effect mode is changed from the next special figure variation display game, the effect mode information address table is set (step A774). , Acquire the address of the table corresponding to the next mode transition information (step A775).

Then, the effect mode number of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired, saved in the effect mode number area in the RWM (step A776), and the remaining number of rotations of the effect of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired.
It is saved in the effect remaining rotation speed area in the RWM (step A777), the next mode transition information of the effect mode to be shifted is acquired, and is saved in the next mode transition information area in the RWM (step A778). After that, a probability information command corresponding to the newly set effect mode number is prepared (step A779), and it is determined whether the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A780). If the prepared probability information command matches the value in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A780; Y), that is, if the probability state has not changed, the effect mode information check process ends.

If the prepared probability information command does not match the value in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A780; N), the prepared probability information command is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A782), and the effect is produced. The command setting process (step A782) is performed.
Next, prepare a production rotation speed command corresponding to the newly set production remaining rotation speed (
Step A783) and the effect command setting process (step A784) are performed.
Next, the time reduction fluctuation number command corresponding to the time reduction fluctuation number is prepared (step A785), and the effect command setting process (step A786) is performed.
Next, it is determined whether the new production mode is a left-handed mode (step A787).
If the mode is not left-handed (step A787; N), the effect mode information check process ends. Further, in the case of the left-handed mode (step A787; Y), the left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A788), and the effect command setting process (step A7) is prepared.
89) is performed to end the effect mode information check process. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of notifying the switching before the specified number of rotations for switching the effect mode. By managing the effect mode with the game control device 100 in this way, it is possible to control, for example, to generate a specific reach only in a specific effect mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Fanfare / Interval processing Transition setting processing 1]
FIG. 46 shows the fanfare / interval processing transition setting process 1 (step A726) in the above-mentioned special figure display processing. In the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1, first, the processing number “3” related to the fanfare / interval processing
Is set (step A791), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A792).

Next, the signal related to the start of the big hit (special game state) (for example, 1 big hit signal is ON (output by big hit + small hit) and 4 big hit signals are ON (output by big hit)) is saved in the external information output data area. (Step A793), high probability & time saving end signal (for example, special symbol 1 high probability state signal OFF, special symbol 2 high probability state signal OFF, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal OFF, special symbol 2 Save the fluctuation time shortened state signal OFF, normal symbol 1 high probability state signal OFF, normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal OFF, normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal OFF) in the test signal output data area. (Step A794). After that, the number of rounds area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state is cleared (step A795), and the number without time reduction is saved in the game state display number area (step A79).
6) Save the Fuzu low probability & no time saving flag in the Fuzu game mode flag area (step A797).

Then, the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared (step A798), and the high probability is high in order to turn off the game state display LED (for example, the third game state display unit 56c) provided on the game board 30 related to the display of the high probability state. The notification flag area is cleared (step A799), and the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A800). Next, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery to save the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step A801), and the special figure variation display that can be executed in the time saving state is displayed. Clear the time reduction fluctuation frequency area for managing the number of games (step A802). As a result, the high-probability state and the time-saving state are terminated, and the normal-probability state and the normal state are set.

After that, the number of the effect mode 1 is saved in the effect mode number area (step A803), and the effect mode number area is saved.
The effect remaining rotation speed area is cleared (step A804), and the non-updated code is saved in the next mode transition information area (step A805). Then, the signal related to the right-handed instruction (for example, the launch position designation signal 1 is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A806).
), In order to light the right-handed display LED (for example, the first game state display unit 56a), the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A807), and the fanfare / interval is in progress. The process transition setting process 1 is terminated. As a result, the information on the effect mode is temporarily cleared when the special game state occurs.

[Small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 47 shows the transition setting process for small hit fanfare in the above-mentioned special figure display process (
Step A739) is shown. In this small hit fanfare medium processing transition setting processing, first
Set "7" for processing during small hit fanfare as the processing number (step A81).
1), the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A812).
Next, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 0.3 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A813), and the signal relating to the start of the small hit (for example, one big hit signal is O.
Save N (output with big hit + small hit) in the external information output data area (step A81)
4).

Next, the area for the number of illegal winnings of the large winning opening is cleared (step A815), and the flag outside the illegal monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area (step A816).
Next, the signal related to the right-handed strike instruction (for example, the launch position designation signal 1 is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A817), and the right-handed display LED (for example, the first game state display unit 56a) is turned on. In order to turn on the light, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A818), and the small hit fanfare processing transition setting process is completed.

[Support operation setting process]
FIG. 48 shows a support operation setting process (step A742) in the above-mentioned special figure display process. In this support operation setting process, first, the initial value corresponding to the time reduction determination data is saved in the time reduction fluctuation number region (step A821), and the signal related to the start of the time reduction (for example, the jackpot 2 signal is turned ON) is external information. Save to the output data area (step A822). That is, when the support hit symbol stops, only the signal related to the start of the time reduction (for example, the big hit 2 signal is turned on) is output as an external information signal.
Next, a signal relating to the start of time reduction (for example, a special symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal is turned ON,
Special symbol 2 Fluctuation time shortened state signal ON, Normal symbol 1 High probability status signal ON, Normal symbol 1
The fluctuation time shortening state signal is turned ON, and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A823).

Next, the number with the time reduction is saved in the game state display number area (step A824), and the flag with the high probability of the normal figure and the time reduction is saved in the normal map gate mode flag area (step A82).
5) In order to maintain the probability state flag and make the time saving, a special figure time saving flag is synthesized in the special figure game mode flag area (step A826).
Next, the signal related to the right-handed strike instruction (for example, the launch position designation signal 1 is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A827), and the right-handed display LED (for example, the first game state display unit 56a) is turned on. In order to turn on the light, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A828). Then, the effect mode information address table is set (step A829), and the address of the table corresponding to the effect mode transition information set at the start of fluctuation (when the stop symbol is set) is acquired (step A830). In step A829, the same processing as the setting in the jackpot end processing (step A904) is performed.

Next, as a process of saving the information necessary for managing the effect mode in the game control device 100, first, the effect mode number of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area. (Step A831). Further, the effect remaining rotation speed of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired, saved in the effect remaining rotation speed area (step A832), and the next mode of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state. The transition information is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A833).

After that, the probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number is prepared (step A834), and
The command is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A835), and the effect command setting process (step A836) is performed. Here, as a probability information command, "high probability /
There are a plurality of commands that further include information on the production mode in either "with time reduction" or "low probability / with time reduction". Although not used in this process, there are other commands such as "high probability / no time saving" and "low probability / no time saving" that further include information on the production mode.
Next, prepare a production rotation speed command corresponding to the newly set production remaining rotation speed (
Step A837), the effect command setting process (step A838) is performed, the time reduction variation number command corresponding to the time reduction variation number is prepared (step A839), and the effect command setting process (step A840) is performed.
Then, the time reduction determination data area is cleared (step A841), the effect mode transition information area is cleared (step A842), and the support operation setting process is completed.

[Special figure normal processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 49 shows a special figure normal process transition setting process (step A74) in the above-mentioned special figure display process.
3, A750) is shown. In this special figure normal processing transition setting process, first, "0" related to the special figure normal processing is set as the processing number (step A851), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A852). ..
Next, the information in the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A853), the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A854), and the special figure normal processing transition setting process is completed. ..

[Big hit end processing]
FIG. 50 shows a jackpot end process (step A15) in the special figure game process of the present embodiment. Since the flowchart of the special figure game processing of the present embodiment is the same as the flowchart of the special figure game processing of the first embodiment (FIG. 10), the illustration is omitted.
In this jackpot end process, first, the probability fluctuation determination data set based on the type of the special result that triggered the execution of the special game state is set when the probability fluctuation state becomes a high probability state after the end of the special game state. It is determined whether the data has a high probability (step A901).
If the data is not high probability data (step A901; N), the jackpot end setting process 1 is performed (step A901; N).
In step A902), if the data has a high probability (step A901; Y), the jackpot end setting process 2 is performed (step A903). Then, the effect mode information address table is set (step A904), and the address of the table corresponding to the effect mode transition information set at the start of fluctuation (when the stop symbol is set) is acquired (step A905).

Next, as a process of saving the information necessary for managing the effect mode in the game control device 100, first, the effect mode number of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area. (Step A906). Further, the remaining effect rotation speed of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved in the effect remaining rotation speed area (step A907), and the mode shifts to the next mode of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state. The information is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A908).

After that, the probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number is prepared (step A909), and
The command is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A910), and the effect command setting process (step A911) is performed. Here, as a probability information command, "high probability /
There are multiple commands that include information on the production mode in any of "with time reduction", "high probability / without time reduction", and "low probability / with time reduction". Although not used in this process, there are other commands that include information on the production mode in "Low probability, no time saving".
Next, prepare a production rotation speed command corresponding to the newly set production remaining rotation speed (
Step A912) and the effect command setting process (step A913) are performed.
Next, the time reduction fluctuation number command corresponding to the time reduction fluctuation number is prepared (step A914), and the effect command setting process (step A915) is performed.

Next, "0" is set as the processing number related to the special figure normal processing (step A916), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A917).
After that, the signal related to the end of the big hit (for example, 1 big hit signal is turned off, 3 big hit signals are turned off, 4 big hit signals are turned off) is saved in the external information output data area (step A9).
18), Signals related to the end of the jackpot (for example, OFF the signal for operating the condition device, OFF the signal for operating the accessory continuous operation device, OFF the signal for one special symbol, and OFF the signal for 2 special symbols
) Is saved in the test signal output data area (step A919). Subsequently, the information in the probability fluctuation determination data area is cleared (step A920), the information in the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of jackpot rounds is cleared (step A921), and the information in the effect mode transition information area is cleared. (Step A922). Then, the information in the special figure game mode flag save area is cleared (step A923), the flag during the fraudulent monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A924), and the jackpot end process is completed.

[Big hit end setting process 1]
FIG. 51 (a) shows the jackpot end setting process 1 (step A9) in the jackpot end process described above.
02) is shown. In the jackpot end setting process 1, first, a signal related to the start of the time saving (for example, the jackpot 2 signal is turned ON) is saved in the external information output data area (step A931).
Since the signal related to the start of the time reduction is output from the big hit, it is saved in the external information output data area in a continuous form. Next, a signal relating to the start of low probability & time reduction (for example, special symbol 1 variation time shortened state signal is turned ON, special symbol 2 variation time shortened state signal is ON, normal symbol 1
The high-probability state signal is turned ON, the normal symbol 1 variation time shortened state signal is turned ON, and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A932).

Next, the number with the time reduction is saved in the game status display number area (step A933), and the flag with the high probability of the time reduction and the time reduction is saved in the normal map game mode flag area (step A93).
4) Save the special figure low probability & time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (step A935). After that, the initial value of the number of time reduction fluctuations (for example, 100) is set in the time reduction fluctuation number region.
) Is saved (step A936), and the jackpot end setting process 1 is terminated.

By the above processing, after the end of the special game state, the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes the normal probability state and the time saving state. Further, by setting the time saving fluctuation number initial value (for example, 100 times) in the time saving fluctuation number region, the time saving state is terminated by executing the special figure variation display game for a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

[Big hit end setting process 2]
FIG. 51 (b) shows the jackpot end setting process 2 (step A9) in the jackpot end process described above.
03) was shown. In the jackpot end setting process 2, first, a signal relating to a high probability start (for example, the jackpot 2 signal is turned ON) is saved in the external information output data area (step A941).
). Since the signal regarding the start with high probability is output from the big hit, it is saved in the external information output data area in a continuous form. Then the signal regarding the start of high probability & time saving (eg,
Special symbol 1 high probability state signal ON, special symbol 2 high probability state signal ON, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal ON, special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal ON, normal symbol 1 high probability state signal ON ON, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal is ON, and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A942).

Next, the number with the time reduction is saved in the game status display number area (step A943), and the flag with the high probability of the normal figure and the time reduction is saved in the normal figure game mode flag area (step A944).
, Special figure game mode Save the special figure high probability & time saving flag in the flag area (step A)
945). After that, the time reduction fluctuation frequency region is cleared (step A946), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is terminated. By the above processing, after the end of the special game state, the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes a high probability state, and the time is shortened until the next special result mode is derived. In the case of the present embodiment, the right-handed mode is set during the time saving state, but since the right-handed mode is set from the big hit, the right-handed setting is not performed in the big hit end setting process 2.
That is, a specific game state (time saving state) in which the game control device 100 extends the period during which the normal variable winning device 37 is opened for a predetermined period after the end of the special game state.
It serves as a specific game state generation control means capable of generating.

52 and 53 show a case where a special figure variation display game in which the result is “per support” is executed. FIG. 52 is an example of the display on the display device 41, and FIG. 53 is an example of the timing chart.
When the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t61), as shown in FIGS. 52 (a) and 53, the variable display ends in the display device 41 and the first
The game result is stopped and displayed on the decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82, and the decorative special figure start memory display (decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory) of the running memory display unit 84 is displayed. ) Disappears. In FIG. 52A, the first start memory number is 4 and the second start memory number is 0 during the stop display time of the special figure 1 variable display game in which the result is “missing”. Indicates the state.

Further, in FIG. 52A, the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby storage display unit 83 is displayed in a specific display mode different from the normal display mode. That is, the standby storage display unit 8
In No. 3, a pending change effect suggesting a look-ahead result is executed. Here, the special figure variable display game corresponding to the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 is a special figure 1 variable display game in which the result is "A per support". , It is suggested by the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display. That is, the number of times of support to be given is suggested by the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display.

Here, since the game result is "missing", in the display device 41, the display mode of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 is one of the "missing" result modes. It is "346".
Further, here, since the game result is "missing", the first start memory number is 4, and the second start memory number is 0, the special figure variation display game and decoration are displayed when the stop display time ends. The special figure variation display game ends, and the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts (t62). After that, when the second predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation time, as shown in FIG. 52 (b), in the display device 41, the transition effect (decorative special figure start memory at the left end of the standby storage display unit 83) The effect of shifting the display to the running storage display unit 84) is executed, and the numerical value of the first start storage number display unit 85a changes. Here, since a plurality of decorative special figure start memory displays are displayed on the standby memory display unit 83, the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 is displayed as an executing memory display due to the transition effect. Along with the transition to the unit 84, the decorative special figure start memory display other than the left end of the standby storage display unit 83 is shifted to the left in the standby storage display unit 83.

When the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation time (t63), as shown in FIGS. 52 (b) and 53, the display device 41 has a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game. Fluctuation display starts. After that, when the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is "per support", as shown in FIGS. 52 (c) and 53, the first decorative game display unit 81
The same identification information is temporarily stopped in the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area of the above, and the reach fluctuation starts (t64).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 52 (d) and 53, in the display device 41, a battle effect in which the ally character fights against the enemy character starts (t65). At the beginning of the battle production
In order to secure a battle effect display unit for displaying the battle effect in the display area of the display device 41, the left variable display area of the first decorative game display unit 81 moves to the left end of the display area of the display device 41. The right variation display area of the first decorative game display unit 81 moves to the right end of the display area of the display device 41, and the standby storage display unit 83 and the running storage display unit 84 are hidden.

Next, as shown in FIG. 52 (e), the result of the battle effect is notified. Here, since the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is "support hit", the result of the battle production is "draw". On the other hand, if the result of the special figure change display game being executed is "big hit", the result of the battle effect is "winning of the ally character", and the result of the special figure change display game being executed is "missing". If is, the result of the battle effect is "losing of the ally character".

Next, as shown in FIG. 52 (f), the game result is temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, rocking display) on the first decorative game display unit 81. Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t66), as shown in FIGS. 52 (g) and 53, the display device 4
In 1, the variable display is completed, the game result is stopped and displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82, and the decorative special figure start memory display of the running storage display unit 84 (No. 1). 1 The decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory disappears. Here, since the game result is "per support A", in the display device 41, the display mode of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 is the result mode of "per support A". It is "434".

Further, as shown in FIGS. 52 (g) and 53, when the stop display time starts (t66),
The support count notification effect starts, and first, the support count given this time is notified. Here, the game result is "A per support", and the number of support times corresponding to "A per support" is 20.
Since it is a number of times, an effect of notifying that the number of times of support given this time is 20 (for example, an effect of displaying "support 20 times" on the support number display unit 86) is executed. On the other hand
When the game result is "B per support", the number of times of support corresponding to "B per support" is 100 times. Therefore, for example, an effect of displaying "100 times of support" on the support number display unit 86 is executed. To. Further, when the game result is "C per support", the number of times of support corresponding to "C per support" is 1000 times. Therefore, for example, the effect of displaying "1000 times of support" on the support number display unit 86 is produced. Will be executed.
Further, as shown in FIG. 52 (g), when the stop display time starts (t66), the standby storage display unit 83 and the running storage display unit 84 reappear.

Here, since the game result is "per support", the first start memory number is 3, and the second start memory number is 0, when the stop display time ends, the special figure variation display game and the decoration feature The figure variation display game ends, and the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts (t67). When the fluctuation time starts (t67), the mode shifts to the chance mode as shown in FIG. 53. Specifically, in the case of the normal game state ST14, when the stop display time of the special figure variation display game whose result is “support hit” ends (t67), the game shifts to the third specific game state ST13. Further, in the case of the first specific game state ST11, when the stop display time of the special figure variation display game in which the result is "support hit" ends (t67).
, Shifts to the second specific game state ST12.

In the present embodiment, only the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the main fluctuation is displayed on the standby storage display unit 83 and the running storage display unit 84, and the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the irregular fluctuation is displayed. It is configured not to be displayed. Therefore, when the mode shifts to the chance mode (t67), the main variation is switched from the special figure 1 variation display game to the special figure 2 variation display game. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 52 (h) and 53, the display device 41 has the display device 41. The decorative special figure start memory display (decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory) of the standby memory display unit 83 disappears.
Specifically, when the game state is the normal game state ST14 or the first specific game state ST11, that is, when the player is not in the chance mode (during normal power support), the standby storage display unit 83
And the running memory display unit 84 can display the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory, but the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the second start memory is hidden. Further, when the gaming state is the second specific gaming state ST12 or the third specific gaming state ST13, that is, in the chance mode (during normal power support), the standby storage display unit 83 and the running storage display unit 83 The decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the second start memory can be displayed on 84, but the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory is hidden.

When the second predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation time, the numerical value of the first start storage number display unit 85a changes in the display device 41 as shown in FIG. 52 (h).
When the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation time (t68), as shown in FIGS. 52 (i) and 53, the display device 41 has a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game. Fluctuation display starts.
When the variation display starts (t68), the remaining number of times of support is notified in the support number of times notification effect. Here, since the number of times of support given this time is 20 and the chance mode (Public support) has started and the first game (first game) is being executed, FIG. 52 (Fig. 52)
As shown in i), an effect of notifying that the remaining number of times of support is 19 (for example, an effect of displaying "19 times remaining" on the support number display unit 86) is executed.

Further, when the variable display starts (t68), the chance mode notification effect starts as shown in FIG. 53. Specifically, in the chance mode notification effect, first, an effect of notifying that the player is in the chance mode is executed, and then an effect of notifying that the player is in the chance mode is executed. During the chance mode (during Fuden support), the special figure fluctuation display whose result is "support hit" The battle effect started during the execution of the game is continued, that is, the special figure fluctuation display whose result is "support hit". In the game, the battle that was not settled due to a draw is continued, so in FIGS. 52 (i) and 52 (j), the effect of displaying "battle mode" is displayed as the effect of notifying that the player is in the chance mode. It is running. This makes it possible to connect the production before and after the transition to the chance mode.
Further, when the variable display starts (t68), as shown in FIG. 53, a right-handed instruction effect for instructing right-handed (for example, an effect of displaying “right-handed →” (see FIGS. 52 (i) and 52 (j))). ) Starts.

Then, when the game ball wins the normal variable winning device 37 and the second start memory (second special figure hold) occurs during the chance mode (during the normal electric support), it is displayed as shown in FIG. 52 (j). In the device 41, a new decorative special figure start memory display appears, the number of the decorative special figure start memory display of the standby storage display unit 83 changes, and the numerical value of the second start memory number display unit 85b changes. ..
Further, when the support hit is derived during the chance mode (during the battle mode), the battle effect is executed and the number of times of support is changed (see FIGS. 31 and 32). Each time the number of supports is changed, the number of ally characters may be increased or decreased, or the ally characters may be leveled up or down. Specifically, for example, when the number of support times after the change is less than the number of support times before the change, the number of ally characters is maintained (or reduced), and the number of support times after the change is the support before the change. If it is more than the number of times, the number of ally characters may be increased as shown in FIG. 52 (k), for example.

The identification information (decorative identification information) that constitutes the symbol per support is a general symbol (designs 1 to 9).
It may be composed of only, a general symbol and a special symbol (special symbol for support), or it may be composed of only a special symbol. ..
That is, the support hit symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81 is shown in FIG. 52 (f).
As shown in FIG. 52, it may be composed of only general symbols, as shown in FIG. 52 (l), it may be composed of general symbols and special symbols, or it may be composed of only special symbols. It may be configured. Further, the support hit symbol that is stopped and displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81 may be composed of only general symbols as shown in FIG. 52 (g).
As shown in FIG. 52 (m), it may be composed of a general symbol and a special symbol.
It may be composed of only special symbols.

In the present embodiment, when both the first start memory and the second start memory are stored, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed with priority over the special figure 1 variable display game.
54 to 58 show a case where the special figure 2 variable display game whose result is “per support” is executed with priority over the special figure 1 variable display game. 54 to 57 are examples of display on the display device 41 and the batch display device 50, and FIG. 58 is an example of a timing chart.

Special Figure 1 When the variable time of the variable display game ends and the stop display time starts, FIG. 54 (a)
As shown in the above, in the display device 41, the variable display is completed and the first decorative game display unit 81
The game result is stopped and displayed on the second decorative game display unit 82, and the decorative special figure start memory display (decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory) of the running memory display unit 84 disappears. Further, in the batch display device 50, the variation display ends and the game result is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display 51. Here, since the game result is "missing", in the display device 41, the display mode of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 is one of the "missing" result modes. In the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 is the result mode of "off". In addition, FIG.
In the example shown in 4 (a), the display mode of the special figure 2 display 52 is the result mode of "off".

Further, here, since the game result is "missing", the first start memory number is 2, and the second start memory number is 0, the special figure variation display game and decoration are displayed when the stop display time ends. The special figure variation display game ends, and the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts. After that, when the second predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation time, FIG. 5
As shown in 4 (b), in the display device 41, a transition effect (an effect of performing a display for shifting the decorative special figure start memory display) is executed, and the numerical value of the first start memory number display unit 85a changes. However, in the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 hold display 53 changes.

Then, when the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation time, as shown in FIG. 54 (b), as shown in FIG. 54 (b).
The display device 41 starts the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game, and the batch display device 50 starts the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game.
When the game ball wins a prize in the start winning opening 36 and the first start memory (first special figure hold) occurs during the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game, the display device 41 shows as shown in FIG. 54 (c). A new decorative special figure start memory display appears, and the number of decorative special figure start memory displays of the standby storage display unit 83 changes, and the numerical value of the first start memory number display unit 85a changes, so that the batch display is performed. In the device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 hold display 53 changes. Here, the new decorative special figure start memory display is displayed in a specific display mode different from the normal display mode. That is, the standby storage display unit 83 executes a hold change effect that suggests a look-ahead result.

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts, FIG. 5
As shown in 4 (d), in the display device 41, the variable display is completed, the game result is stopped and displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82, and the running memory display is displayed. The decorative special figure start memory display (decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory) of the unit 84 disappears. Further, in the batch display device 50, the variable display is completed and the special figure 1 display 51
The game result is stopped and displayed. Here, since the game result is "missing", in the display device 41, the display mode of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 is one of the "missing" result modes. In the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 is the result mode of "off".

Further, here, since the game result is "missing", the first start memory number is 2, and the second start memory number is 0, the special figure variation display game and decoration are displayed when the stop display time ends. The special figure variation display game ends, and the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts. After that, when the second predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation time, FIG. 5
As shown in 4 (e), in the display device 41, the transition effect is executed and the first
The numerical value of the start storage number display unit 85a changes, and in the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 hold display 53 changes.

Then, when the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation time, as shown in FIG. 54 (e), as shown in FIG. 54 (e).
The display device 41 starts the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game, and the batch display device 50 starts the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game.
Special Figure 1 When a game ball wins a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 and a second start memory (second special figure hold) occurs during execution of the variable display game, the display device 41 is shown in FIG. 54 (f). In, the numerical value of the second start storage number display unit 85b changes, and in the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 hold display 54 changes.

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t7).
1), as shown in FIGS. 54 (g) and 58, in the display device 41, the variable display is completed and the game result is stopped and displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82. At the same time, the decorative special figure start memory display (decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory) of the running memory display unit 84 disappears. Further, in the batch display device 50, the variation display ends and the game result is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display 51. Here, since the game result is "missing", in the display device 41, the display mode of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 is one of the "missing" result modes. In the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 is the result mode of "off".

Further, here, since the game result is "off" and the first start memory number is 1 and the second start memory number is 1, when the stop display time ends, the special figure variation display game and decoration The special figure variation display game ends, and the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts (t72). After that, when the second predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation time, as shown in FIG. 55 (a), in the display device 41, the second start storage number display unit 85
The numerical value of b changes, and in the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 hold display 54 changes. Here, since the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory is displayed on the standby memory display unit 83, even if the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game starts, the transition effect (decorative special) is displayed. Figure The effect of shifting the start memory display) is not executed.

Next, when the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation time (t73), as shown in FIGS. 55 (a) and 58, in the display device 41, the decoration special figure variation corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game The variable display of the display game starts, and the variable display of the special figure 2 variable display game starts on the batch display device 50. After that, the result of the special figure fluctuation display game being executed is "per support".
In the case of, the reach variation starts in the first decorative game display unit 81 of the display device 41 (t74), the battle effect starts in the display device 41 (t75), and the result of the battle effect is notified. Here, since the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is "support hit", the result of the battle effect is "draw".

Next, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), the game result is temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, rocking display) on the first decorative game display unit 81. Then, when the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t76), as shown in FIG. 55 (c), in the display device 41, the variable display ends and the first decoration The game result is stopped and displayed on the game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82, the variation display is completed on the batch display device 50, and the game result is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display 52. Here, since the game result is "per support A", in the display device 41, the display mode of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 is the result mode of "per support A". It is "434", and the batch display device 50
In, the display mode of the special figure 2 display 52 is the result mode of "A per support".

Further, as shown in FIGS. 55 (c) and 58, when the stop display time starts (t76),
The support count notification effect starts, and first, the support count given this time is notified. Here, the game result is "A per support", and the number of support times corresponding to "A per support" is 20.
Since it is a time, an effect of notifying that the number of times of support given this time is 20 (for example, an effect of displaying "remaining 20 times" on the support number display unit 86) is executed.
Further, as shown in FIG. 55 (c), when the stop display time starts (t76), the standby storage display unit 83 and the running storage display unit 84, which were hidden at the start of the battle effect, reappear.
Here, since the game result is "per support", the first start memory number is 1, and the second start memory number is 0, the special figure variation display game and the decoration feature are displayed when the stop display time ends. The figure variation display game ends, and the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts (t77). When the fluctuation time starts (t77), the mode shifts to the chance mode as shown in FIG. 58.

When the second predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation time, as shown in FIG. 55 (d), the numerical value of the first start storage number display unit 85a changes in the display device 41, and in the batch display device 50, the numerical value is changed. Special figure 1 The display mode of the hold display 53 changes.
When the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation time (t78), as shown in FIGS. 55 (d) and 58, the display device 41 has a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game. The variation display of the above is started, and the variation display of the special figure 1 variation display game is started in the batch display device 50.

When the variation display starts (t78), the remaining number of times of support is notified in the support number of times notification effect. Here, since the number of times of support given this time is 20 and the chance mode (Public support) has started and the first game (first game) is being executed, FIG. 55 (Fig. 55)
As shown in d) and (e), an effect of notifying that the remaining number of times of support is 19 (for example, an effect of displaying "19 times remaining" on the support number display unit 86) is executed.
Further, when the variable display starts (t78), as shown in FIG. 58, a right-handed instruction effect for instructing right-handed (for example, an effect of displaying “right-handed →” (see FIGS. 55 (d) and 55 (e))). ) Starts.

Further, when the variation display starts (t78), the chance mode notification effect starts as shown in FIG. 58. Specifically, in the chance mode notification effect, first, as shown in FIG. 55 (d), an effect of notifying the entry into the chance mode (for example, "chance mode entry screen").
Is executed, and then, as shown in FIG. 55 (e), an effect of notifying that the player is in the chance mode (for example, an effect of displaying the “chance mode in-screen”) is executed. Here, the first decorative game display unit 81 (large design) is hidden by the chance mode entry screen and the chance mode middle screen, but the present invention is not limited to this. Specifically, for example, the chance mode entry screen or the chance mode middle screen may be displayed in a size that does not overlap with the first decorative game display unit 81, or may be displayed on the front side of the chance mode entry screen or the chance mode middle screen. The first decorative game display unit 81 may be displayed.

In the present embodiment, the decorative special figure start memory display is hidden at the start of the battle effect and redisplayed when the symbol is confirmed. If the hold change effect is executed in the standby memory display unit 83 before it is hidden, the decorative special figure start memory display of the standby memory display unit 83 is hidden at the start of the battle effect and the symbol is displayed. When redisplayed at the time of confirmation, for example, FIGS. 55 (a) to 55 (e)
) May be redisplayed in a state where the hold change effect is not executed (the hold change effect is canceled), or, for example, as shown in FIGS. 55 (f) to 55 (j), the hold change effect is executed. It may be redisplayed in the state of being displayed.

Specifically, in FIG. 55 (a), the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby storage display unit 83, and in FIG. 55 (c), the decorative special figure start memory displayed at the left end of the standby storage display unit 83. The display is a decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the same start memory. The display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display is a specific display mode before non-display (FIG. 55 (a)), whereas it is a normal display mode when redisplayed (FIG. 55 (c)). .. That is, it reappears in a state where the display mode is reset.
Further, in FIG. 55 (f), the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby storage display unit 83 and the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby storage display unit 83 in FIG. 55 (h) are , A decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the same start memory. The display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display is a specific display mode before non-display (FIG. 55 (f)) and at the time of redisplay (FIG. 55 (h)).
) Is also the specific display mode.

Further, when the hold change effect is redisplayed in the executed state, the effect mode of the hold change effect at the time of redisplay is, for example, as shown in FIGS. 55 (f) to 55 (j), the effect mode before non-display. It may be the same as, for example, as shown in FIGS. 56A to 56E, it may be different from the production mode before hiding.
Specifically, in FIG. 55 (f), the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby storage display unit 83, and in FIG. 55 (h), the decorative special figure start memory displayed at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83. The display is a decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the same start memory. The display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display is the same before non-display (FIG. 55 (f)) and when redisplay (FIG. 55 (h)). That is, it reappears in a state in which the display mode before hiding (before the start of the battle effect) is inherited.
Further, in FIG. 56 (a), the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby storage display unit 83 and the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby storage display unit 83 in FIG. 56 (c) are , It is a decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the same start memory. Among the display modes of the decorative special figure start memory display, the display modes (colors in the case of this embodiment) for suggesting the look-ahead result are before non-display (FIG. 56 (a)) and at the time of re-display (FIG. 56). The display mode (here, the shape) which is the same as (c)) but different from the display mode for suggesting the look-ahead result is before hiding (FIG. 56 (a)).
)) And when it is redisplayed (FIG. 56 (c)).

The battle effect should be started not only during the execution of the special figure variation display game whose result is "per support", but also during the execution of the special figure variation display game whose result is other than "per support". However, depending on whether the result of the special figure fluctuation display game that was executed at the start of the battle effect is "support hit" or not "support hit", there is a pending change effect at the time of reappearance. Or, the production mode of the pending change effect at the time of reappearance may be different.
Specifically, for example, the decorative special figure start memory display is hidden during the execution of the special figure variation display game (for example, at the start of the battle effect), and at the start of the stop display time of the special figure variation display game (for example, at the start of the battle effect).
If it is redisplayed at (when the symbol is confirmed) and the hold change effect is executed in the standby storage display unit 83 before it is hidden, the result of the special figure variation display game is "support". If it is a "hit", as shown in FIGS. 55 (a) to 55 (e), it is redisplayed without executing the hold change effect, and if the result of the special figure variation display game is a "big hit", FIG. 56 ( Similar to a) to (e), if the pending change effect is redisplayed in the executed state (the effect mode is different from that before the non-display) and the result of the special figure variation display game is "off", FIG. 55 ( Similar to f) to (j), the hold change effect may be redisplayed in the executed state (the effect mode is the same as before the non-display).

Further, in the present embodiment, only the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the main fluctuation is displayed on the standby storage display unit 83 and the running storage display unit 84, and the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the irregular fluctuation is displayed. Is configured not to be displayed, but is not limited to this. For example, the standby storage display unit 83 can display only the decorative special figure start storage display corresponding to the main fluctuation, and the running storage display unit 84 can display only the decorative special figure start storage display corresponding to the main fluctuation. Instead, it may be possible to display a decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to irregular fluctuations.
In that case, when the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the running memory display unit 84 is the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the irregular fluctuation, for example, FIGS. 57 (a) to 57 (e). As shown, the pending change effect may be executed in the executing memory display unit 84.
For example, as shown in FIGS. 57 (f) to 57 (j), the pending change effect may not be executed in the executing storage display unit 84.

The hold change effect executed by the waiting hold display unit 83 is the waiting storage display unit 8.
By displaying the decorative special figure start memory display displayed in 3 in a specific display mode, an effect suggesting a look-ahead result such as a result of a special figure variation display game or a variation pattern corresponding to the decoration special figure start memory display. Is.
Further, the pending change effect executed by the executing storage display unit 84 is the executing storage display unit 8.
By displaying the decorative special figure start memory display displayed in 4 in a specific display mode, the result of the special figure variation display game (currently running special figure variation display game) corresponding to the decoration special figure start memory display. It is a production that suggests fluctuation patterns.

Specifically, in FIG. 57 (c), the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby storage display unit 83, and in FIG. 57 (e), the decorative special figure start memory display in the running memory display unit 84. Is a decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the same special figure variation display game. The display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display is the same before the transition to the executing memory display unit 84 (FIG. 57 (c)) and after the transition to the executing memory display unit 84 (FIG. 57 (e)). ing. That is, the display mode before the transition is inherited and the transition to the execution storage display unit 84 is performed.
The display mode after the transition to the running storage display unit 84 may be a display mode different from the display mode before the transition. Specifically, for example, among the display modes of the decorative special figure start memory display, the display mode (color in the case of the present embodiment) for suggesting the look-ahead result is inherited even after the transition.
The display mode (for example, shape) different from the display mode for suggesting the look-ahead result may be different before and after the transition.

Further, in FIG. 57 (h), the decorative special figure start memory display on the left end of the standby storage display unit 83 and the decorative special figure start memory display on the running storage display unit 84 in FIG. 57 (j) are the same. This is a decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the special figure variable display game. The display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display is a specific display mode before the transition to the running storage display unit 84 (FIG. 57 (h)), whereas after the transition to the running storage display unit 84 (FIG. 57). (J)) is a normal display mode. That is, the display mode is reset and the process shifts to the running storage display unit 84.

Further, since only the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the main fluctuation is displayed on the standby storage display unit 83, the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the standby storage display unit 83 is the first start memory. In the case of the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to, the decorative special figure start memory display is hidden when the chance mode starts and reappears when the chance mode ends. For example, as shown in FIG. 59, when the first start memory generated before the start of the chance mode is not digested during the chance mode, the hold change effect targeting the first start memory before the start of the chance mode is performed. If it has been executed, when the chance mode ends, it may reappear in a state in which the display mode before the start of the battle effect is inherited.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 55 (d), (i), 56 (d), 57 (d), and (i), the standby storage display unit 83 and the running storage display unit 84 have a chance mode entry screen. Hidden in, but not limited to this. Specifically, for example, the size of the chance mode entry screen does not overlap with the standby memory display unit 83 and the running memory display unit 84 (including the decorative special figure start memory display) (for example, the same size as the chance mode screen). The standby memory display unit 83 and the running memory display unit 84 may be displayed on the front side of the chance mode entry screen.
Further, when the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 is a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to irregular variation,
The decorative special figure start memory display (decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory of the main variation) of the standby storage display unit 83 may be hidden. That is, FIGS. 55 (a) and 55 (f) and FIG. 56 (a).
), In the examples shown in FIGS. 57 (a) and 57 (f), the decorative special figure start memory display (decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory) displayed on the standby storage display unit 83 is not set. It may be displayed.

In the example shown in FIGS. 54 to 58, at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game (t72 to t73), the display mode of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 of the display device 41 is ". The result mode of "off" is the display mode of the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50.
This is the result aspect of "off". Therefore, the special figure 2 is in a state where the stop symbol (off symbol) of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 and the stop symbol (off symbol) of the special figure 1 display 51 are aligned. Variable display of the variable display game (variable display on the special figure 2 display 52) and variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game (variable display of the special figure 2 variable display game)
The variable display on the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82) will be started.
Of course, at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game (t72 to t73), the stop symbols of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 are aligned with the stop symbols of the special figure 2 display 52. If not, the variable display of the special figure 2 variable display game (variable display on the special figure 2 display 52) and the decoration corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game remain in the inconsistent state. The variable display of the special figure variable display game (variable display in the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82) will be started.

The special effect performed during the special figure variation display game in which the result is "per support" is not limited to the battle effect, and can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, for example, during the special figure variation display game in which the result is "support hit", in addition to (or instead of) the battle effect, a pseudo-continuous effect that repeats the variation display of the large symbol may be executed. ..
FIG. 60 shows an example of a case where a pseudo continuous effect is executed as a special effect to be performed during the special figure 2 variable display game in which the result is “C per support”. Since FIG. 60 (a) is a diagram showing the same state as FIG. 55 (a), the description thereof will be omitted.

Here, since the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is “support hit”, the pseudo continuous effect is started in the first decorative game display unit 81 after the start of the variation display. When the pseudo-continuous effect starts, as shown in FIG. 60 (b), first, a special symbol for suggesting the number of support times and a general symbol (here, “4”) suggesting the number of times of support to be given are temporarily stopped and displayed. Since the result of the special figure fluctuation display game being executed is "C per support", the number of times of support actually given is 1000.
Although it is the number of times, here, a special symbol for suggesting the number of support times is temporarily stopped and displayed, which suggests that the number of times of support is given less than the number of times of support actually given. Specifically, a special symbol for suggesting the number of times of support, which suggests that the number of times of support to be given is 20, is temporarily stopped and displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 60 (c), the suggested number of times is the support number display unit 86.
Is displayed in.
Then, as shown in FIG. 60 (c), the re-variation display of the large symbol starts, and then FIG. 60 (
As shown in d), a special symbol for suggesting the number of times of support and a general symbol (here, "5") suggesting the number of times of support to be given are temporarily stopped and displayed. Here, a special symbol for suggesting the number of support times, which suggests the number of times of support to be added, is temporarily stopped and displayed. Specifically, a special symbol for suggesting the number of support times, which suggests that the number of times of support to be added is 80, is temporarily stopped and displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 60 (e), the suggested number of times is added to the number of times displayed on the support number display unit 86.

Then, as shown in FIG. 60 (e), the re-variation display of the large symbol starts, and then FIG. 60 (e).
As shown in f), a special symbol for suggesting the number of support times and a general symbol (here, "6") suggesting the number of times of support to be given are temporarily stopped and displayed. Here, a special symbol for suggesting the number of support times, which suggests the number of times of support to be added, is temporarily stopped and displayed. Specifically, a special symbol for suggesting the number of support times, which suggests that the number of times of support to be added is 900, is temporarily stopped and displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 60 (g), the suggested number of times is added to the number of times displayed on the support number display unit 86.

Then, as shown in FIG. 60 (g), the re-variation display of the large symbol starts, and then FIG. 60 (
As shown in h), the game result is temporarily stopped and displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81, and the pseudo continuous effect ends. Then, when the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts, as shown in FIG. 60 (i), in the display device 41, the variable display ends and the first decorative game display unit The game result is stopped and displayed on the 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82.
Here, since the game result is "C per support", in the display device 41, the display mode of the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 is the result mode of "C per support". It is "656".

Further, as shown in FIG. 60 (i), when the stop display time starts, the support number notification effect starts, and first, the support number given this time is notified. Here, since the game result is "C per support" and the number of times of support corresponding to "C per support" is 1000 times, an effect of notifying that the number of times of support given this time is 1000 times (for example, support). The effect of displaying "Support 1000 times!" On the number display unit 86) is being executed.
Further, here, since the game result is "per support" and the first start memory number is 1 and the second start memory number is 0, when the stop display time ends, the special figure variation display game and The decorative special figure variation display game ends, and the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts. When the fluctuation time starts, the mode shifts to the chance mode as shown in FIG. 60 (j).

In FIG. 60, the case where the pseudo-continuous effect is executed during the special figure 2 variable display game in which the result is “support hit” is illustrated, but in the pseudo-continuous effect, the special figure 1 variable display in which the result is “support hit” is illustrated. It can also be run during the game. The same applies to special effects other than pseudo-continuous effects (for example, battle effects).
Further, in FIG. 60, a case where a pseudo continuous effect is executed during a special figure variation display game in which the result is “C per support” is illustrated, but in the pseudo continuous effect, the special figure in which the result is “A per support” is illustrated. It can be executed during the variable display game, or it can be executed during the special figure variable display game in which the result is "B per support".

In the pseudo-continuous production executed during the special figure variation display game in which the result is "A per support",
For example, FIGS. 60 (d) to 60 (g) are omitted. That is, when the pseudo-continuous production starts, FIG. 60
As shown in (b), first, the special symbol for suggesting the number of times of support is temporarily stopped and displayed, and then FIG. 60
As shown in (c), the re-variation display of the large symbol starts, and then the first decorative game display unit 81
The game result is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the pseudo-continuous production ends. Then, when the fluctuation time of the special figure variation display game ends and the stop display time starts, the game result (“A per support”) is displayed on the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82. "434") is stopped and displayed, and the mode shifts to the chance mode.

Further, in the pseudo-continuous production executed during the special figure variation display game in which the result is "B per support", for example, FIGS. 60 (f) to 60 (g) are omitted. That is, when the pseudo-continuous production starts,
As shown in FIG. 60 (b), first, a special symbol for suggesting the number of support times is temporarily stopped and then displayed.
As shown in FIG. 60 (c), the re-variation display of the large symbol is started, then, as shown in FIG. 60 (d), the special symbol for suggesting the number of support times is temporarily stopped and displayed, and then FIG. 60 (e). ), The re-variation display of the large symbol starts, and then the game result is temporarily stopped and displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81, and the pseudo continuous effect ends. Then, when the variable time of the special figure variation display game ends and the stop display time starts, the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82
The game result (“545”, which is the result mode of “B per support”) is stopped and displayed, and the mode shifts to the chance mode.

In FIGS. 60 (b), (e), and (f), a special symbol for suggesting the number of support times is temporarily stopped and displayed in the medium fluctuation display area of the first decorative game display unit 81, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a special symbol for suggesting the number of support times may be temporarily stopped and displayed in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas.
Further, the number of additional supports is not limited to "80 times" and "900 times", and can be changed as appropriate. Further, the number of times of support initially suggested (the number of times of support less than the number of times of support actually given) is not limited to "20 times" and can be changed as appropriate.
Of course, in the special effect (for example, battle effect, pseudo-continuous effect) performed during the special figure variation display game in which the result is "support hit", the game state is the normal game state ST14 or the first specific game state ST11.
Not only when the game state is, the second specific game state ST12 and the third specific game state ST1
It is also feasible when it is 3. That is, the special effect can be executed regardless of whether or not it is in the chance mode (during Fuden support).

In addition, when the stop display time of the special figure variation display game in which the game result is "per support" starts, the support count notification effect starts, and first, the support count given this time is notified, but the stop display time The number of times of support notified during may be different from the number of times of support actually given. Specifically, for example, even if it is notified that the number of times of support is given less than the number of times of support actually given during the stop display time, and an additional effect of adding the number of times of support is executed during the chance mode. good.
FIG. 61 shows an example of an additional effect performed after the end of the special figure 2 variable display game in which the result is “C per support”. Since FIG. 61 (a) is a diagram showing the same state as FIG. 55 (a), the description thereof will be omitted.

Here, since the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is "per support", FIG. 61 (b)
), The support hit symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81, and when the variable time of the special figure variable display game ends and the stop display time starts, as shown in FIG. 61 (c). In addition, the support hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82. Here, since the game result is "C per support", in the display device 41, the result mode common to "A per support", "B per support", and "C per support" as the symbol per support is "767". Is temporarily stopped or stopped. Of course, not only when the game result is "C per support", but also when the game result is "A per support" or "B per support", the result common to each "per support" as a symbol per support. It is possible to temporarily stop and display the mode "767".

Further, as shown in FIG. 61 (c), when the stop display time starts, the support number notification effect starts, and first, the support number to be given is notified. Here, the game result is "C per support", and the number of times of support corresponding to "C per support" is 1000 times, but it is notified that the number of times of support to be given is smaller than the number of times of support actually given. An effect (for example, an effect of displaying "20 times remaining" on the support count display unit 86) is being executed.
Further, here, since the game result is "per support" and the first start memory number is 1 and the second start memory number is 0, when the stop display time ends, the special figure variation display game and The decorative special figure variation display game ends, and the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts. When the fluctuation time starts, the mode shifts to the chance mode.

When the mode shifts to the chance mode, the chance mode notification effect starts. Specifically, in the chance mode notification effect, first, as shown in FIG. 61D, an effect of notifying the entry into the chance mode (for example, an effect of displaying a “chance mode entry screen”) is executed, and then an effect of displaying the “chance mode entry screen” is executed. , As shown in FIG. 61 (e), an effect of notifying that the chance mode is in progress (for example, ""
The effect of displaying the "chance mode in-screen") is executed.
During the chance mode (during Fuden support), the game ball wins the normal variable winning device 37 and the second
When the start memory (second special figure hold) occurs, as shown in FIGS. 61 (f) and 61 (g), in the display device 41, a new decorative special figure start memory display appears and the standby memory display unit As the number of decorative special figure start memory displays of 83 changes, the numerical value of the second start memory number display unit 85b changes.

Here, the number of times of support to be added is displayed on the new decorative special figure start memory display. Then, as shown in FIG. 61 (h), the fluctuation time of the next special figure variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) starts, and the transition effect (decorative special figure start memory display is shifted) is displayed. When the effect) is executed, the number of times of support displayed on the decorative special figure start memory display that shifts to the running memory display unit 84 is added to the number of times displayed on the support number display unit 86. Here, since "80" is displayed on the decorative special figure start memory display that shifts to the running memory display unit 84, "80 times" is added to the number of times displayed on the support number display unit 86.

Further, as shown in FIG. 61 (i), the fluctuation time of the next special figure variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) starts, and the transition effect (decorative special figure start memory display is shifted) is displayed. When the effect) is executed, the number of times of support displayed on the decorative special figure start memory display that shifts to the running memory display unit 84 is added to the number of times displayed on the support number display unit 86. Here, since "900" is displayed on the decorative special figure start memory display that shifts to the running memory display unit 84, "900 times" is added to the number of times displayed on the support number display unit 86. Further, the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display displayed as "900" is a specific display mode different from the normal display mode. That is, the hold change effect for the start memory corresponding to the decorative special figure start memory display is executed.

The number of additional supports is not limited to "80 times" and "900 times", and can be changed as appropriate. Further, the number of times of support notified before the additional effect (the number of times of support less than the number of times of support actually given) is not limited to "20 times" and can be changed as appropriate.
Further, in the present embodiment, the start memory that is not the target of the hold change effect (here, FIG. 61 (f).
) Corresponding to the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to) and the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory (here, the start memory generated in FIG. 61 (g)) that is the target of the hold change effect. It is possible to display the number of times of support to be added to both, but it is not limited to this. For example, it may be possible to display the number of times of support to be added only to the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory that is not the target of the hold change effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, it corresponds to the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory of the special figure change display game whose result is "missing" and the start memory of the special figure change display game whose result is "big hit". It is possible to display the number of times of support to be added to both the decoration special figure start memory display and the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory of the special figure variation display game whose result is "support hit". , Not limited to this. For example, it may be possible to display the number of times of support to be added only to the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory of the special figure variation display game whose result is "off".

For example, if it is possible to display the number of times of support to be added only to the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory of the out-of-order fluctuation (special figure change display game whose result is "out of place"),
Since it is suggested whether or not the game is out of alignment depending on whether or not the number of times of support is displayed, the player can grasp that the game result is "out of alignment" even before the out-of-bounds fluctuation starts. There is a risk that the interest of fluctuations will decline.
On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, in the present embodiment, the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the special figure variation display game in which the result is "missing" and the special figure variation display game in which the result is "big hit" By making it possible to display the number of times of support to be added to both the corresponding decorative special figure start memory display and the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the special figure variation display game whose result is "support hit", Since it is not suggested whether or not the fluctuation is out of alignment depending on whether or not the number of times of support is displayed, it is possible to improve the interest of the out of alignment fluctuation.

FIG. 61 illustrates a case where the additional effect is executed during the chance mode that has entered with the end of the special figure 2 variable display game in which the result is “support hit”. However, in the additional effect, the result is “support hit”. It is also possible to execute it during the chance mode that has entered with the end of a certain special figure 1 variable display game.
Further, in FIG. 61, an example is illustrated in which an additional effect is executed during the chance mode that has entered with the end of the special figure variation display game in which the result is “C per support”, but in the additional effect, the result is “per support”. It is also possible to execute during the chance mode that entered with the end of the special figure variation display game of "A", and the chance mode that entered with the end of the special figure variation display game whose result is "B per support". It is also possible to run inside.

Further, in FIG. 61 (b), “767”, which is a result mode common to each “support hit”, is temporarily stopped and displayed on the first decoration game display unit 81, and in FIG. 61 (c), the first decoration game is displayed. The display unit 81 and the second decorative game display unit 82 stop and display "767", which is a common result mode for each "support hit", but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the game result is "C per support", "656", which is the result mode of "C per support", is temporarily stopped and displayed on the first decorative game display unit 81, and the first decorative game display unit is displayed. "C per support" on 81 and the second decorative game display 82
The result mode of "656" may be stopped and displayed.
For example, when the temporary stop display or the stop display of "656", which is a result mode peculiar to "C per support", is displayed, the player grasps the number of times of support actually given at the stage before the execution of the additional effect. Since it becomes possible to do so, there is a risk that the interest of the additional production will be reduced. On the other hand, as in the example shown in FIG. 61, by temporarily stopping and displaying the result mode common to each "support hit", it is actually given at the stage before the execution of the additional effect. Since the number of times of support can be ambiguous, it is possible to improve the interest of the additional production.

[Modified example of support hit judgment]
In the above embodiment, the small hit determination (small hit lottery) and the support hit determination (support lottery) are performed using the same random numbers as the big hit determination (big hit lottery). That is, in the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 35 to 40, for example, a big hit random number is used to perform a big hit determination, a small hit determination, and a support hit determination (see FIG. 29 (a)), and the determination result is obtained. If it is a big hit,
The stop symbol information corresponding to the big hit symbol random number is acquired (see FIG. 29 (b)), and when the determination result is a small hit, the stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number is acquired (FIG. 29 (c). ), If the judgment result is a support hit, the stop symbol information corresponding to the support symbol random number is acquired (see FIG. 29 (d)), and if the judgment result is neither, the stop of the loss is stopped. I tried to get the design information, but it is not limited to this.

For example, the support hit may be derived only in the normal game state ST14 (no low probability support). Specifically, for example, in the normal game state ST14, when the determination result is a big hit, the stop symbol information corresponding to the big hit symbol random number is acquired, and when the determination result is a small hit, it corresponds to the small hit symbol random number. The stop symbol information to be performed is acquired, the stop symbol information corresponding to the support symbol random number is acquired when the judgment result is per support, and the stop symbol information of the deviation is acquired and specified when the judgment result is neither. Game status ST11 to ST13
In, when the determination result is a big hit, the stop symbol information corresponding to the big hit symbol random number is acquired, and when the determination result is a small hit, the stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number is acquired.
When the determination result is neither a big hit nor a small hit (including the case where the determination result is a support hit), the stop symbol information of the deviation may be acquired. That is, in the case of a high probability state or the support of a general electric train, the processing related to the support (steps A149a to A149).
b, steps A151a to A151d, steps A370-A372, step A390
~ A392 etc.) may be skipped.
Alternatively, the support hit may be derived only in the low probability state (normal game state ST14, third specific game state ST13), or the state without the normal electric support (normal game state ST14, first). The support hit may be derived only in the case of the specific game state ST11).

[Modification example 1 of support hit determination]
For example, the support hit determination may be performed depending on whether or not the value of the support hit random number extracted separately from the jackpot random number matches the support hit determination value. In this case, for example, the distribution rate is as shown in FIG. 62. Specifically, for example, a big hit judgment and a small hit judgment are performed using a big hit random number (see FIG. 62 (a)), and when the judgment result is neither a big hit nor a small hit, the support hit random number is used to hit the support. The determination is made (see FIG. 62 (d)). Then, when the determination result is a big hit, the stop symbol information corresponding to the big hit symbol random number is acquired (see FIG. 62 (b)), and when the determination result is a small hit, it corresponds to the small hit symbol random number. Acquire the stop symbol information to be performed (Fig. 62 (c)
), When the judgment result is per support (that is, when there is support operation), the stop symbol information corresponding to the symbol random number per support is acquired (see FIG. 62 (e)), and the judgment result is If neither is the case, the out-of-order stop symbol information is acquired.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
In this modification, the game control device 100 executes the special figure start port switch common process shown in FIG. 63 instead of the special figure start port switch common process shown in FIG. 34. In this special figure start port switch common process, after the process of step A144 is performed, a random number per support is extracted and prepared (step A150a), and the prepared random number per support is saved in the random number storage area per support of the RWM. After performing (step A150b), the process proceeds to step A149a.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
In this modification, the game control device 100 executes the jackpot flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 64 (a) instead of the jackpot flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 36 (a). In this jackpot flag 1 setting process, after the process of step A363 is performed, a random number per support is loaded and prepared from the random number storage area per support (for the number of hold 1) of the special figure 1 of the RWM (step A373a), and the special figure is prepared. After performing the process (step A373b) of clearing the random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of 0 per support, the process proceeds to the process of step A364.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
In this modification, the game control device 100 executes the jackpot flag 2 setting process shown in FIG. 64 (b) instead of the jackpot flag 2 setting process shown in FIG. 36 (b). In this jackpot flag 2 setting process, after performing the process of step A383, a random number per support is loaded and prepared from the random number storage area per support (for the number of hold 1) of the special figure 2 of RWM (step A393a), and the special figure is prepared. After performing the process (step A393b) of clearing the random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of 2 per support to 0, the process proceeds to the process of step A384.

[Support hit judgment processing]
In this modification, the game control device 100 replaces the support hit determination process shown in FIG. 38.
The support hit determination process shown in FIG. 65 is executed. In this support hit determination process, step A42
After performing the process of 2, it is determined whether the value of the random number per support of the target is less than the lower limit determination value per support (step A423a).

Then, when the value of the random number per support of the target is less than the lower limit determination value per support (step A4).
23a; Y), that is, if it is not a support hit, a deviation is set as the determination result (step A428), and the support hit determination process is terminated. Further, when the value of the random number per support of the target is not less than the lower limit determination value per support (step A423a; N), it is determined whether the state is in a high probability state (step A424). Then, in the case of a high probability state (step A424; Y),
The upper limit determination value per support in high probability is set (step A425), and it is determined whether the value of the random number per support of the target is larger than the upper limit determination value per support (step A427a). If the probability is not high (step A424; N), the upper limit judgment value per support during the low probability is set (step A426), and it is determined whether the value of the random number per support of the target is larger than the upper limit judgment value per support. (Step A427a).

When the value of the random number per support of the target is larger than the upper limit determination value per support (step A427a;
Y), that is, if it is not a support hit, a deviation is set as a judgment result (step A42).
8), the jackpot determination process is completed. Further, when the value of the random number per support of the target is not larger than the upper limit determination value per support (step A427a; N), that is, when it is per support, the support hit is set as the determination result (step A429), and the support hit determination is performed. End the process.

The probability of winning the lottery per support may be different or the same for each probability set value. When different for each probability set value, for example, the lower the probability set value, the easier it is to win the lottery per support (that is, setting 1 is the easiest to win and setting 6 is the most difficult to win). Is good, and vice versa. In addition, the probability of winning the lottery per support may be different or the same for each jackpot probability state. When differentiating each jackpot probability state, for example, the low probability state (normal probability state) may be easier to win than the high probability state, or vice versa. .. In addition, it may be possible to win only when the probability is low. Further, the probability of winning the lottery per support may be different between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.

In this modified example as well, the support hit may be derived only in the normal game state ST14 (no low probability support). Specifically, for example, the normal game state ST14
In, when the judgment result is neither a big hit nor a small hit, the support hit judgment is performed using the support hit random number, and when the judgment result is a big hit, the stop symbol information corresponding to the big hit symbol random number is acquired, and the judgment result is When it is a small hit, the stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number is acquired, and
When the determination result is a support hit, the stop symbol information corresponding to the support symbol random number is acquired, and when the determination result is neither, the stop symbol information of the deviation is acquired, and in the specific game states ST11 to ST13, the stop symbol information is acquired. Without performing the support hit judgment using the support hit random number, the stop symbol information corresponding to the big hit symbol random number is acquired when the judgment result is a big hit, and the small hit symbol random number is supported when the judgment result is a small hit. It is also possible to acquire the stop symbol information to be performed, and to acquire the stop symbol information of the deviation when the determination result is neither a big hit nor a small hit. That is,
When the probability is high or the electric power is being supported, the processing related to the support (steps A150a to A150b, steps A149a to A149b, steps A151a to
A151d, steps A373a to A373b, steps A370 to A372, steps A393a to A393b, steps A390 to A392, etc.) may be skipped.
Alternatively, the support hit may be derived only in the low probability state (normal game state ST14, third specific game state ST13), or the state without the normal electric support (normal game state ST14, first). The support hit may be derived only in the case of the specific game state ST11).

[Modification example 2 of support hit determination]
Further, for example, the support hit symbol or the out-of-support symbol may be acquired by using the support hit symbol random number without performing the support hit determination. That is, the stop symbol information corresponding to the random number of the symbol per support may include not only the stop symbol information per support but also the stop symbol information of the outlier. In this case, for example, the distribution rate is as shown in FIG. 66. Specifically, for example, a jackpot determination and a small hit determination are performed using a jackpot random number (see FIG. 66A), and when the determination result is a jackpot, the stop symbol information corresponding to the jackpot symbol random number is provided. If it is acquired (see FIG. 66 (b)) and the determination result is a small hit, the stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number is acquired (see FIG. 66 (c)). Then, when the determination result is neither a big hit nor a small hit, the stop symbol information per support or the stop symbol information that is out of support is acquired as the stop symbol information corresponding to the symbol random number per support (see FIG. 66 (d)). ..

In this modified example as well, the support hit may be derived only in the normal game state ST14 (no low probability support). Specifically, for example, the normal game state ST14
In (without low-probability support), when the judgment result is neither a big hit nor a small hit, the stop symbol information per support or the stop symbol information that is out of support is acquired and specified as the stop symbol information corresponding to the symbol random number per support. In the game states ST11 to ST13, when the determination result is neither a big hit nor a small hit, the stop symbol information of the loss may be acquired.
Alternatively, the support hit may be derived only in the low probability state (normal game state ST14, third specific game state ST13), or the state without the normal electric support (normal game state ST14, first). The support hit may be derived only in the case of the specific game state ST11).

[Other Modifications 1]
The small hit symbol (small hit result mode) and the support hit symbol (support hit result mode) may be used in combination. Specifically, for example, a dual-purpose symbol that also serves as a small hit symbol and a support hit symbol is provided.
When the dual-purpose symbol is stopped and displayed on the display device 41 (and the batch display device 50), the chance mode (second specific game state ST12, third specific game state ST1) is performed after the end of the small hit game state.
You may rush into 3).

[Other Modifications 2]
The ordinary variable winning device 37 may be arranged at a position where both left-handed and right-handed winning can be won (for example, the lower center of the game area 32). For example, if the support hit symbol (A symbol per support, etc.) that corresponds to a relatively small number of supports is a distribution that stops frequently, the chance mode will start and end frequently. By arranging the normal variable winning device 37 at a position where both right-handed and left-handed winning can be won, it is necessary to divide the game ball into the left side game area and the right side game area according to the start and end of the chance mode. It disappears. Further, when the normal variable winning device 37 is arranged at a position where both right-handed and left-handed winning can be won, the large winning opening and the normal variable winning device 37 are located at a position upstream of the large winning opening in the right game area. A function (nails, flow paths, etc.) for distributing game balls may be provided in the variable winning device 37. The symbol per support with a relatively small number of corresponding supports is not limited to the symbol A per support with a corresponding number of supports of 20 times, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the number of times of support corresponding is less than 5 times. It may be a design per support.

[Other Modifications 3]
The result mode of the special figure variation display game may not be provided with the symbol per support (result mode per support), but the result mode of the normal map variation display game may be provided with the symbol per support (result mode per support). That is, instead of deriving the support hit in the special figure fluctuation display game, the support hit may be derived in the normal figure fluctuation display game.

[Other Modifications 4]
In the above embodiment, when the mode is changed to the chance mode, the right-handed instruction effect is always executed. That is, regardless of the symbol per support to be stopped (the number of times of support given), the right-handed instruction effect is executed when the mode shifts to the chance mode, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, only when the support hit symbol (A symbol per support, etc.) that corresponds to a relatively small number of supports stops, when the chance mode is entered, a right-handed instruction effect is executed to encourage the user to accumulate the second start memory. You may. The symbol per support with a relatively small number of corresponding supports is not limited to the symbol A per support with a corresponding number of supports of 20 times, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the number of corresponding supports is one. It may be a design per support.
Also, only when the first special figure variation display game is the special figure 1 variation display game after shifting to the chance mode, when the chance mode is shifted, the right-handed instruction effect is executed and the second start memory is accumulated. You may urge.
Further, only when the normal game state ST14 is shifted to the chance mode, when the chance mode is shifted, the right-handed instruction effect may be executed to prompt the player to accumulate the second start memory.

[Other Modifications 5]
In the present embodiment, there is no time reduction for shortening the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation display game when the normal power supply is not supported, and the time reduction for shortening the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation display game when the normal power supply is being supported. The fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation display game that is executed when the normal power is not supported is longer than the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation display game that is executed when the normal power is supported. Not limited to. For example, the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation display game executed when the normal power support is not supported may be the same as the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation display game executed when the normal power support is in progress. As a result, it becomes possible to store the second start memory immediately after shifting to the chance mode. Since the game machine 10 of the present embodiment is a game machine that executes the special figure 2 variable display game with priority over the special figure 1 variable display game, the game shifts to the chance mode and the first special figure variable display game ends. By generating the second start memory by the time
It is possible to execute the main variation (special figure 2 variation display game) next to the first special figure variation display game, and the game can be advanced in an advantageous manner for the player.
If the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation display game that is executed when the normal power support is not supported is the same as the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation display game that is executed when the normal power support is in progress, the normal power support It is preferable to set the probability of hitting a normal figure to 0 when it is not inside.

[Other Modifications 6]
In the above embodiment, when the mode is changed to the chance mode, the number of times of support given this time is always notified. That is, regardless of the symbol per support to be stopped (the number of times of support given), the number of times of support given this time is notified when the stop display time starts, but the number of times of support is not limited to this, for example, it is given this time. Depending on the number of times of support, it may be decided whether or not to notify the number of times of support. Specifically, for example, when a symbol per support (such as a symbol A per support) that has a relatively small number of corresponding supports stops, the number of times of support given this time is not notified even if the stop display time starts. At the same time, when the other support hit symbols are stopped, when the stop display time starts, the number of times of support given this time may be notified. The symbol per support with a relatively small number of corresponding supports is not limited to the symbol A per support with a corresponding number of supports of 20 times, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the number of times of support corresponding is less than 10 times. It may be a design per support.

[Other Modifications 7]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 53 and 58, right-handed instruction effect (instruction of launch direction).
Is now started at the start of the variable display of the game to be executed next to the game (game per support) whose result is a specific result. That is, the right-handed instruction effect is started at the start of the variation display (t68, t78) of the special figure variation display game to be executed first after shifting to the chance mode, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the right-handed instruction effect may be started at the start of the fluctuation time (t67, t77) of the special figure variation display game to be executed first after shifting to the chance mode, or the stop display time of the game per support. It may be started at the start (t66, t76). Further, it may be started before the start of the stop display time of the support per game (for example, during the temporary stop display of the result of the support per game).

[Other Modifications 8]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 53 and 58, the chance mode notification effect is started at the start of the variable display of the game to be executed next to the game (game per support) whose result is a specific result. did. That is, the chance mode notification effect is started at the start of the variation display (t68, t78) of the special figure variation display game to be executed first after shifting to the chance mode, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the chance mode notification effect may be started at the start of the fluctuation time (t67, t77) of the special figure variation display game to be executed first after shifting to the chance mode, or the stop display time of the game per support. It may be started at the start (t66, t76). Further, it may be started before the start of the stop display time of the support per game (for example, during the temporary stop display of the result of the support per game). Further, the chance mode notification effect and the right-handed instruction effect may be started at the same timing or at different timings.

[Other Modifications 9]
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 53 and 58, the support count notification effect is started at the start of the stop display time of the game per support (t66, t76), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the support count notification effect may be started at the start of the fluctuation time (t67, t77) of the special figure variation display game to be executed first after shifting to the chance mode, or may be executed first after shifting to the chance mode. The special figure variation display game may be started at the start of the variation display (t68, t78). Further, it may be started before the start of the stop display time of the support per game (for example, during the temporary stop display of the result of the support per game).

[Other Modifications 10]
Further, in the present embodiment, the big hit symbol, the small hit symbol, and the support hit symbol are acquired by using different random numbers, but the big hit symbol, the small hit symbol, and the support hit symbol are acquired by using the same random number. You may try to do it. That is, one random number may be shared by the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, and the support hit symbol random number, and the big hit symbol, the small hit symbol, and the support hit symbol may be distributed.

[Other Modifications 11]
The game machine 10 of the present embodiment is not limited to the game machine that executes the special figure 2 variable display game with priority over the special figure 1 variable display game. That is, the game machine 10 of the present embodiment may be a game machine that executes one of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game with priority over the other, or the special figure 1 variable display game. And the special figure 2 variable display game may be a gaming machine that executes the game in the order of winning.

From the above, the game machine 10 of the present embodiment executes a game (special figure variation display game) based on the establishment of the starting condition, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, the game value is given to the player. A game machine capable of generating a special game state to be given, which is specified as a normal variable winning device 37 in which a starting condition is satisfied by winning a game ball, and a normal game state (normal game state ST14, first specific game state ST11). Game state (second specific game state ST12, third specific game state ST13)
And a game state control means (game control device 100) capable of generating a special game state, and the game state control means is such that the result of the game is a predetermined result among the special results (in the present embodiment, a normal big hit or the like). Probability change A jackpot), a specific game state can be generated after the special game state is generated, and if the result of the game is a specific result (per support) different from the special result, it is special. It is configured so that a specific gaming state can be generated without generating a gaming state (see FIG. 30).

Therefore, since a specific gaming state (hobby support) occurs with a predetermined probability before the special gaming state occurs, it is necessary to suppress the amount of money spent by the player and the speed at which the number of balls held is reduced. Is possible, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.
Further, since the specific game state (hobby support) may occur not only after passing through the special game state but also without passing through the special game state, the transition timing of the game state increases. As a result, the interest of the game can be enhanced.
In addition, if the specific game state (Public power support) occurs frequently, the gambling may become too high, but since the ball output in the specific game state (Public power support) is included in the ball output rate and the accessory ratio, it is specified. If the game state (Public support) occurs frequently, it is necessary to suppress the ball output in the special game state. Therefore, even if the specific game state (Public electric support) occurs frequently, the gambling property does not become too high, and it is possible to calm the wave of the ball output.

Further, in the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the result of the game (special figure variation display game) is a specific result (
A setting means for setting a period corresponding to the specific result as a specific game period (number of times of support) for generating a specific game state (second specific game state ST12, third specific game state ST13) when the support is reached. (Game control device 100) is provided, and when the result of the game becomes a specific result during the occurrence of the specific game state, the setting means resets the specific game period being set and corresponds to the specific result. The period can be configured to be resettable (FIG. 31).
reference).
With this configuration, when a specific result (per support) is derived during the specific game state (second specific game state ST12, third specific game state ST13), the specific game period (number of support times) is set. Since it can be extended, the interest of the game is improved.

Further, in the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the result of the game (special figure variation display game) is a specific result (
A setting means for setting a period corresponding to the specific result as a specific game period (number of times of support) for generating a specific game state (second specific game state ST12, third specific game state ST13) when the support is reached. (Game control device 100) is provided, and when the result of the game becomes a specific result during the occurrence of the specific game state, the setting means adds the period corresponding to the specific result to the remaining period of the specific game period. The period can be configured to be resettable as a specific game period (see FIG. 32 (a)).
With this configuration, when a specific result (per support) is derived during the specific game state (second specific game state ST12, third specific game state ST13), the specific game period (number of support times) is set. Since it will be extended, the interest of the game will be improved.

Further, the game machine 10 of the present embodiment includes an effect control means (effect control device 300) for executing an effect related to a game (special figure variation display game), and the effect control means is after a special game state occurs. The generated specific game state (second specific game state ST12, third specific game state ST1)
3) and the specific game state that occurred without the special game state (second specific game state ST12,
It can be configured so that the effect can be executed in the third specific game state ST13).
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the specific gaming state (second specific gaming state ST12, third specific gaming state ST13).
The specific game state (second specific game state ST12) that occurred after the special game state occurred.
, 3rd specific game state ST13) and the specific game state (2nd specific game state ST12, 3rd specific game state ST13) that occurred without the special game state occurring. You may. As a result, whether it is the specific game state (second specific game state ST12, third specific game state ST13) generated based on the derivation of the special result (big hit), or the specific game generated based on the derivation of the specific result (per support). Since it is possible to suggest whether the state (second specific game state ST12, third specific game state ST13) is achieved by the effect executed during the specific game state, the interest of the game is improved.

In addition, the specific game state (second specific game state ST12) that occurred after the special game state occurred.
, 3rd specific game state ST13) and the specific game state (2nd specific game state ST12, 3rd specific game state ST13) that occurred without the special game state occurring. You may.
Specifically, for example, a specific game state (second specific game state ST12, third specific game state ST13) that occurred after the special game state occurred, and a specific game state that occurred without the special game state (2nd specific game state ST12, 3rd specific game state ST13). When the specific game period (number of times of support) is the same in the second specific game state ST12 and the third specific game state ST13), the same aspect of the effect may be executed. That is, for example, the production mode of the effect executed in the chance mode generated based on the derivation of the jackpot (normal jackpot in the case of the present embodiment) in which the corresponding number of supports is 100, and the corresponding number of supports is 100. Per support (B per support in the case of this embodiment)
It may be the same as the effect mode of the effect executed in the chance mode generated based on the derivation of.

Further, the game machine 10 of the present embodiment includes an instruction means (effect control device 300) for instructing the launch direction of the game ball which is advantageous for the player, and the instruction means indicates that the result of the game is a specific result (per support). In such a case, it is possible to configure the game to start the instruction of the firing direction in response to the start of the game to be executed next to the game (see FIGS. 53 and 58).
With such a configuration, it is possible to accurately indicate the launch direction of the game ball, so that the interest of the game is improved.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the gaming machine of the third embodiment will be described. It should be noted that basically, it has the same configuration as the game machine of the second embodiment described above, and mainly different parts will be described below. Specifically, the game machine of the third embodiment is different from the game machine of the second embodiment in that the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed at the same time.

First, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. 67. FIG. 67 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 67, the game board 30 includes a flat-plate-shaped game board main body 80 that serves as a mounting base for various members. The game board main body 80 is made of wood or synthetic resin, and the front surface of the game board main body 80 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and an outer peripheral wall (guide rail) 31 provided at each of the four corners of the game board 30. The game area 32 is provided. The game machine 10 is configured to launch a game ball from a hitting ball launching device into a game area 32 surrounded by an outer peripheral wall 31 to play a game. A windmill, an obstacle nail, or the like is arranged in the game area 32 as a member for changing the flow direction of the game ball, and the launched game ball changes the rolling direction by these members and changes the rolling direction of the game area 32.
Flow down.

A center case 40 that forms a window portion that serves as a display area for a variable display game is attached to substantially the center of the game area 32. Behind the window portion formed in the center case 40, a display device 41 as an effect display device (variable display device) for variablely displaying a plurality of identification information is arranged.
The display device 41 (variable display device) is composed of, for example, a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) and a CRT (cathode ray tube). Still images and moving images can be displayed as effect images in the area (display area) where the image of the display screen can be displayed. Information about the game such as a background image that enhances the effect is displayed. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variablely displayed (variable display), and a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is performed. In addition, an image for producing an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen.

In the center case 40, a warp flow path forming member 614 that forms a warp flow path for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a game ball that has passed through the warp flow path roll. A possible stage portion 620 is provided. Since the stage portion 620 of the center case 40 is arranged above the first starting winning opening 36, the stage portion 620
The game ball rolled above is easy to win in the first starting winning opening 36.
Further, the center case 40 is provided with a board effect device 44 which has a movable member and a light emitting member, and produces a game by the operation of the movable member and the light emission of the light emitting member.

As shown in FIG. 67, the first start winning opening 36 (first start winning prize) that gives a start condition of the special figure 1 variable display game (first special figure variable display game) to the game area 32 below the center case 40. Area) is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 68). The game area 32 below the first start winning opening 36 is provided with an out opening 30a for collecting game balls that have not won in the winning opening or the like.

A general winning opening 35 is provided on the left side of the first starting winning opening 36 in the game area 32 below the center case 40. The winning of the game ball into the general winning opening 35 is detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 68). Further, a general winning opening 35 is also provided on the right side of the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40 and on the right side of the first starting winning opening 36 in the gaming area 32 below the center case 40. The winning of the game ball into the general winning opening 35 is also detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 68).

As shown in FIG. 67, a normal symbol start gate (normal symbol start gate) 34 is provided in the upper part of the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40. Inside the normal drawing start gate 34,
Gate switch 34a for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal drawing start gate 34 (FIG. 6)
8) is provided. The game ball driven into the game area 32 is the normal drawing start gate 34.
After passing through, the normal map variation display game is executed. A general winning opening 35 is provided below the normal drawing start gate 34. Game balls can flow down to the left and right of the general winning opening 35.

In the central part of the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, there is a first special variable winning device (upper large winning opening) that can be converted into a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which the game ball is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. ) 38 is provided. The first special variable winning device 38 is an opening / closing member 38c.
By tilting to the right with the lower end as the center, the upper prize opening is converted into a state in which a game ball can flow in. The first special variable winning device 38 converts the upper prize opening from the closed state to the open state according to the result of the special figure fluctuation display game, and facilitates the inflow of the game ball into the upper prize opening. , A predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. The game ball that has won the first special variable winning device 38 is detected by the large winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 68).

Inside the upper prize opening (winning area), a specific area where game balls can flow in is provided, and a lever solenoid 38f is provided so as to change the inflow probability of the game balls into the specific area.
A lever member that operates according to (see FIG. 68) is provided. A specific area switch 38d (see FIG. 68) capable of detecting the inflow of the game ball is provided in the specific area, and based on the detection of the game ball by the specific area switch 38d, a state advantageous for the player can be obtained. It occurs (in the present embodiment, a high probability state occurs after the end of the special gaming state).
The game ball that has flowed into the specific area is discharged to the outside of the first special variable winning device 38.

Further, inside the upper prize opening, a residual ball discharge port switch 38e (see FIG. 68) for detecting a game ball discharged to the outside of the first special variable winning device 38 without flowing into a specific area is provided. ing. The number of game balls (the number of game balls that have flowed into the upper prize opening) detected by the large prize switch 38a provided inside the upper prize opening, the specific area switch 38d, and the remaining ball discharge port switch 3
By matching the number of game balls detected in 8e (the number of game balls discharged from the upper prize opening), it can be confirmed that all the game balls in the upper prize opening are discharged, and basically this confirmation. Until the end of the event, the new top prize opening will not be opened.

At the lower part of the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, a normal variable winning device 37 (first starting winning area) that gives a start condition for the special figure 1 variable display game (first special figure variable display game) is provided. ing. The game ball that has won the ordinary variable winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 68). The normal variable winning device 37 includes a plate-shaped movable member 37b that can slide back and forth, and the movable member 37b always protrudes forward to prevent the game ball from flowing into the normal variable winning device 37 in a closed closed state (game). It is in a disadvantageous state for the person). Then, when the result of the normal fluctuation display game is a predetermined result, the movable member 37b is retracted rearward by the normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 68) as a driving device, and the game is played in the normal fluctuation winning device 37. It can be changed to an open state (a state advantageous for the player) in which the ball can easily flow in.

In the present embodiment, the movable member 37b of the ordinary variable winning device 37 is a so-called tongue-shaped ordinary electric accessory that opens and closes by advancing and retreating (sliding) in the front-rear direction by the normal variable winning device 37. The movable member of the device 37 is not limited to this. The movable member of the ordinary variable winning device 37 may be, for example, an attacker-type ordinary electric accessory that is opened by rotating the upper end side in a direction in which the upper end side falls toward the front side by the ordinary electric solenoid 37c, or the ordinary electric solenoid 37c. It may be a tulip-shaped ordinary electric accessory that opens in an inverted "C" shape. Further, the normal variable winning device 37 enables the winning of the game ball even when the movable member is closed, and the game ball may be more difficult to win in the closed state than in the open state.

Game balls can flow down to the left and right of the normal variable winning device 37. An out port 30a for collecting game balls that have not won a prize in the winning opening or the like is provided in the flow path on the right side of the ordinary variable winning device 37. Further, the flow path on the left side of the normal variable winning device 37 communicates below the game area 32.
A second start winning opening 97 that gives a start condition for a special figure 2 variable display game (second special figure variable display game) on the right side of the game area 32 below the center case 40, that is, below the normal variable winning device 37. (Second start winning area) is provided. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening 97 is detected by the starting opening 3 switch 97a (see FIG. 68).

Of the game area 32 below the center case 40, the game ball is not accepted on the right side of the first start winning opening 36 and on the left side of the second starting winning opening 97 depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. A second special variable winning device (lower large winning opening) 39 that can be converted into a state that is easy to accept is provided. The second special variable winning device 39 converts the lower large winning opening into a state in which a game ball can flow in by moving the opening / closing member 39c back and forth (sliding). The second special variable winning device 39 converts the lower large winning opening from the closed state to the open state according to the result of the special figure variation display game, and facilitates the inflow of the game ball into the lower large winning opening. , A predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. The game ball that won the second special variable prize device 39
It is detected by the grand prize opening switch (count switch) 39a (see FIG. 68). The front side of the game area 32 on the right side is covered with a transparent plate capable of seeing through the game area 32.
Further, on the lower left side of the game board main body 80 outside the game area 32, a special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 1 variable display game, special figure 2 variable display game) and a general figure variable display game are collectively executed. A display device 50 is provided.

That is, in the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the normal variable winning device 37 is not the second starting winning area in which the special figure 2 variable display game (the second special figure variable display game) is given the start condition, but the special figure 1 variable. The special figure 2 variable display game (2nd special figure variable display game) is located below the normal variable winning device 37 and the point that is the first start winning area that gives the start condition of the display game (1st special figure variable display game).
The second point is that the second start winning opening 97 (second starting winning area) that gives the start condition of
It is different from the gaming machine 10 of the embodiment (see FIG. 3).

FIG. 68 is a block diagram of the control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 68, in the game control device 100 of the present embodiment, the interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 is connected to the start port 3 switch 97a in the second start winning opening 97. 2 It is different from the game control device 100 (see FIG. 5) of the embodiment.

FIG. 69 shows an example of the distribution rate in this embodiment.
In the present embodiment, as in the second embodiment, the small hit determination (small hit lottery) and the support hit determination (support lottery) are performed using the same random numbers as the big hit determination (big hit lottery). That is,
In the present embodiment, a big hit judgment, a small hit judgment, and a support hit judgment are performed using a big hit random number (
(See FIG. 69 (a)), and when the determination result is a big hit, the stop symbol information corresponding to the big hit symbol random number is acquired (see FIG. 69 (b)), and when the determination result is a small hit. Acquires the stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number (see FIG. 69 (c)), and when the determination result is a support hit, acquires the stop symbol information corresponding to the support per symbol random number (figure). 69 (d)), if the determination result is neither, the out-of-order stop symbol information is acquired. It should be noted that the support hit may be derived only in the low probability state (normal game state ST24, third specific game state ST23), or the state without the normal electric support (normal game state ST24,
The support hit may be derived only in the case of the first specific game state ST21), or the support hit may be derived only in the case of the normal game state ST24 (no low probability support). good.

[Game state transition diagram (game flow)]
Next, the transition (transition) of the game state by the game control of the game control device 100 will be described. FIG. 70 is a game state transition diagram (game flow) showing the transition of the game state in the present embodiment.
It is a figure exemplifying.
The gaming states include a normal gaming state ST24, a first specific gaming state ST21, a second specific gaming state ST22, and a third specific gaming state ST23. In addition to this, as a gaming state, the first special result (
There are a first special gaming state (big hit gaming state) based on the big hit) and a second special gaming state (small hit gaming state) based on the second special result (small hit), but they are omitted here.

In each game state, the first special result (big hit) that will be controlled by the game control device 100.
The special figure probability from which is derived, the effect mode controlled by the effect control device 300 to determine the effect mode of the game, the main start area which is the start area mainly to be aimed at in the game state, and the special figure variation display game to be mainly executed. The main fluctuation special map, which is the type of, and the launch direction of the game ball are defined.

In the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to aim for a prize in the first start winning opening 36 by hitting left, and aiming for a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 or the second starting winning opening 97 by hitting right. You can do it. That is, it is possible to select the target starting area according to the player's will.
Further, in the present embodiment, the small hit probability, which is the probability of a small hit (second special result), is
Special figure 2 is higher than special figure 1.

In the normal game state ST24, the special figure probability is a low probability state, and there is no general electric support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning, and the special figure variable display game or normal Figure Fluctuation display There is no time saving to shorten the fluctuation time of the game. In addition, the effect mode that defines the effect mode is a normal mode. The main variation special figure is a special figure 1 variation display game, the main starting area is the first starting winning opening 36, and the firing direction is left-handed in order to aim at the first starting winning opening 36. That is, the special figure 1 variable display game is the main variable, and the special figure 2 is
It is designed to make variable display games irregular fluctuations. This normal game state ST
In No. 24, a very long fluctuation time is set for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. As a result, the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes inefficient in terms of time, and the player does not select the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game aiming at the acquisition of a small hit in the normal game state ST24. ..

In the first specific game state ST21, the special figure probability is a high probability state, and there is no general electric support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning, but the special figure variable display. There is a certain time reduction for shortening the fluctuation time of games and normal map fluctuation display games. Also,
The effect mode that defines the effect mode is a small hit RUSH. The main variation special figure is a special figure 2 variation display game, the main starting area is the second starting winning opening 97, and the firing direction is right-handed in order to aim at the second starting winning opening 97. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 2 variable display game is the main variation and the special figure 1 variable display game is the irregular variation.

In this first specific game state ST21, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variation display game is shortened as compared with the case of the normal game state ST24, and the special figure is aimed at the second start winning opening 97 by hitting right. 2 It is advantageous for the player to play the variable display game. The small hit probability is higher in the special figure 2 variable display game than in the special figure 1 variable display game, and the small hit is more likely to be won than the big hit. Therefore, the small hit is high in this first specific game state ST21. It occurs frequently and the player's ball is increased. Since small hits occur frequently in this way, the effect mode is a mode called small hit RUSH.

The second specific game state ST22 is a state in which the special figure probability is high, and there is a general electric support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning. If there is a normal power support, it will be possible to shorten the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game and the normal map fluctuation display game. The effect mode that defines the effect mode is the chance mode. Further, the main variable special figure is a special figure 1 variable display game, the main starting area is the normal variable winning device 37, and the firing direction is right-handed in order to aim at the normal variable winning device 37. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 1 variable display game is the main variation and the special figure 2 variable display game is the irregular variation. In the second specific game state ST22, the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variation display game is shortened as compared with the case of the normal game state ST24, and a right-handed hit is aimed at the normal variation winning device 37, and special figure 1 It is advantageous for the player to play the variable display game.
The third specific game state ST23 is the same as the second specific game state ST22 except that the special figure probability is a low probability state.

Of these four gaming states, the normal gaming state ST24 is the most disadvantageous state for the player. The third specific game state ST23 is a state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state ST24 because it has a general electric support, and the second specific game state ST22 is a high probability state, so that the normal game state ST24 and the third This is a state more advantageous to the player than the specific game state ST23. The first specific game state ST21 is a high-probability state, and further, the player's ball is increased due to the frequent occurrence of small hits. Therefore, the normal game state ST24 and the second specific game state ST2
This is a state more advantageous to the player than the second or third specific game state ST23.
In the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 69 (b), there are two types of jackpots in the special figure 1 variable display game, a probability variation A jackpot and a normal jackpot, and in the special figure 2 variable display game. There are three types of jackpots: probability variation A jackpot, probability variation B jackpot, and normal jackpot.

The transition of the gaming state is the end of the first special gaming state based on the derivation of the first special result (big hit).
It is done by deriving per support and digesting the specified number of games. Therefore, the gaming state does not shift due to the end of the second special gaming state based on the derivation of the second special result (small hit).
Basically, if the special result that triggered the start of the special game state is a normal jackpot that is set to a low probability state after the end of the special game state, the process shifts to the third specific game state ST23, and the special Of the probability variation jackpots that are set to the high probability state after the end of the gaming state, if the probability variation A jackpot is the probability variation A jackpot, the transition to the second specific gaming state ST22 is performed, and if the probability variation B jackpot is the probability variation B jackpot, the first specific gaming state ST21 is entered. ..

Specifically, when the probability variation A jackpot is derived as a result of the special figure variation display game and the special gaming state is entered, and V is passed in the special gaming state (the specific area of the first special variation winning device 38 (1st special variation winning device 38).
When the game ball flows into the probabilistic operation area) and is detected by the specific area switch 38d), the process shifts to the second specific game state ST22 after the end of the special game state. In addition, as a result of the special figure fluctuation display game, the probability variation B jackpot is derived and becomes a special game state, and V in the special game state.
In the case of passing (when the game ball flows into the specific area (probability variation operation area) of the first special variable winning device 38 and is detected by the specific area switch 38d), the first is after the end of the special game state.
It shifts to the specific game state ST21. In addition, as a result of the special figure variation display game, a normal jackpot is derived and a special game state is set, and when V is not passed in the special game state (a game ball in a specific area (probability variation operation area) of the first special variation winning device 38). If the game does not flow in), the game shifts to the third specific game state ST23 after the end of the special game state. Since the second specific game state ST22 and the third specific game state ST23 have the same chance mode as the effect mode, it is difficult for the player to grasp that the mode has changed.

It should be noted that the number of STs (for example, 20), which is the number of special figure fluctuation display games that can be executed in a high probability state.
00 times) is set, and when the number of executions of the special figure variation display game from the end of the special game state reaches the ST number in the first specific game state ST21, the game shifts to the normal game state ST24. Is also good.
In addition, the number of STs (for example, 20), which is the number of special figure fluctuation display games that can be executed in a high probability state.
00 times) is set, and when the number of executions of the special figure variation display game from the end of the special game state reaches the ST number in the second specific game state ST22, the normal game state ST24 (or the third specific game) is set. It is also possible to shift to the state ST23).
Further, in FIG. 70, the transition of the gaming state when the jackpot is derived as a result of the irregular fluctuation is omitted. Specifically, although not shown in FIG. 70, for example, in the normal game state ST24, the second specific game state ST22, and the third specific game state ST23, as a result of irregular fluctuation (special figure 2 fluctuation display game). When the probability change B jackpot is derived and the game is in the special game state and V is passed in the special game state (the game ball flows into the specific area (probability change operation area) of the first special variation winning device 38 and the specific area switch 38d is used. If detected), the game shifts to the first specific game state ST21 after the end of the special game state.

When a normal jackpot is derived and the game shifts to the third specific game state ST23, it is possible to stay in the third specific game state ST23 until the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times. When the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times without deriving the big hit or the support hit in the specific game state ST23, the game shifts to the normal game state ST24. That is, in the present embodiment, the number of times the jackpot is normally supported is set to "100 times". The number of times the jackpot is normally supported is not limited to "100 times" and can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, when the probability variation jackpot A is derived and shifts to the second specific gaming state ST22, 10
It is possible to stay in the second specific game state ST22 until the special figure variation display game of 00 times is executed, and in the second specific game state ST22, a big hit or a support hit is not derived and the special figure of 1000 times is not derived. When the variable display game is executed, the game shifts to the first specific game state ST21. That is, in the present embodiment, the number of times of support for the probability change A jackpot is "1000 times".
Is set to. The number of support times for the probability change A jackpot is not limited to "1000 times".
It can be changed as appropriate, and may be, for example, "until the next big hit or support hit".

Further, as described above, the transition of the gaming state is also performed by the derivation per support.
Specifically, in the normal game state ST24 and the third specific game state ST23, when a support hit is derived as a result of the special figure variation display game, the third specific game state is performed after the end of the special figure variation display game. Move to ST23. Further, in the first specific game state ST21 and the second specific game state ST22, when a support hit is derived as a result of the special figure variation display game, the second specific game state ST22 is performed after the end of the special figure variation display game. Move to. That is, the transition (transition) of the gaming state when the probabilistic jackpot or the normal jackpot is derived goes through the special gaming state, whereas the transition (transition) of the gaming state when the support hit is derived.
Does not go through the special game state. Therefore, for example, in the first specific game state ST21 (without high probability support), when a support hit is derived as a result of the special figure variation display game, the special game state is changed after the end of the special figure variation display game. Second specific game state S without going through
It is possible to shift to T22 (with high probability support).

When A per support is derived and shifts to the third specific game state ST23 (or the second specific game state ST22), the third specific is specified until the special figure variation display game is executed 50 times. It is possible to stay in the game state ST23 (or the second specific game state ST22), and in the third specific game state ST23 (or the second specific game state ST22), a big hit or a support hit is not derived and 50 times. When the special figure fluctuation display game is executed,
It shifts to the normal game state ST24 (or the first specific game state ST21). That is, in this embodiment, the number of times A is supported per support is set to "50 times". The number of times A is supported per support is not limited to "50 times" and can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, when the support hit B out of the support hits is derived and shifts to the third specific game state ST23 (or the second specific game state ST22), the first is said until the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times. It is possible to stay in the 3 specific game state ST23 (or the 2nd specific game state ST22), and the 3rd specific game state ST23 (or the 2nd specific game state ST2).
When the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times without deriving the big hit or the support hit in 2), the game shifts to the normal game state ST24 (or the first specific game state ST21). That is, in this embodiment, the number of times B is supported per support is set to "100 times". The number of times B is supported per support is not limited to "100 times" and can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, when C per support is derived and shifts to the third specific game state ST23 (or the second specific game state ST22), the first is said until the special figure variation display game is executed 1000 times. It is possible to stay in the 3 specific game state ST23 (or the 2nd specific game state ST22), and the 3rd specific game state ST23 (or the 2nd specific game state ST).
When the special figure variation display game is executed 1000 times without deriving the big hit or the support hit in 22), the game shifts to the normal game state ST24 (or the first specific game state ST21). That is, in the present embodiment, the number of times of support of C per support is set to "1000 times". The number of times C is supported per support is not limited to "1000 times" and can be changed as appropriate.

In the present embodiment, as in the second embodiment, when the support hit is derived during the chance mode (during the normal electric support), that is, the support hit is derived in the second specific game state ST22 and the third specific game state ST23. If so, the number of support times is reset and the number of times of support corresponding to a new support is reset (see FIG. 31). Further, in the present embodiment, as in the second embodiment, the effect mode is changed in response to the change in the remaining number of times of support. It is not necessary to change the production mode in response to the change in the remaining number of times of support. Further, it is possible to allow only the rank up of the effect mode and not to switch the effect mode to lower the rank.

Alternatively, when the support hit is derived during the chance mode (during Fuden support), the support count corresponding to the new support hit may be added to the remaining support count (FIG. 32 (a)). )reference). In this case, the maximum number of support times (for example, 1000)
If the sum of the remaining number of times of support and the number of times of support corresponding to a new support exceeds the maximum number of times, the remaining number of times of support may be changed to the maximum number of times. Further, in this case, the effect mode may or may not be changed in response to the change in the remaining number of times of support. Further, it is possible to allow only the rank up of the effect mode and not to switch the effect mode to lower the rank.

Alternatively, when a support hit is derived during the chance mode (during Fuden support), the remaining number of supports is compared with the number of supports corresponding to a new support hit, which is more advantageous (advantageous for the player). (1) may be adopted (FIG. 32 (b)). In this case,
The production mode may or may not be changed in response to the change in the remaining number of support times. Further, it is possible to allow only the rank up of the effect mode and not to switch the effect mode to lower the rank. Further, when the support number corresponding to the new support hit is not adopted, the support hit symbol may be displayed on the display device 41 as the game result, or as the game result, the out-of-support symbol may be displayed instead of the support hit symbol. It may be displayed on the display device 41.

In the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is performed by launching a game ball (pachinko ball) toward the game area 32 from a hit ball launching device (not shown). The launched game ball is
The game area 32 is flowed down while changing the rolling direction by the direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged in various places in the game area 32, and the general drawing start gate 34, the general winning opening 35, and the first starting winning opening 36 , Ordinary variable winning device 37, 2nd starting winning opening 97, 1st special variable winning device 38 or 2nd
The special variable winning device 39 is won, or it flows into the out port 30a and is discharged from the game area 32. Then, when the game ball wins in the general winning opening 35, the first starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, the second starting winning opening 97, the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39, a prize is won. A number of prize balls corresponding to the types of winning openings are discharged from the payout unit controlled by the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 68) to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23 of the glass frame 15.

In the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player adjusts the firing force and launches the game ball into the left game area (so-called left-handed) to obtain the first start winning opening 36 and the first starting winning opening 36. It is possible to aim for a prize in the general winning opening 35 arranged on the left side of the game, and by launching a game ball into the right game area (so-called right-handed), the game starting gate 34 and the game starting gate 34 A general winning opening 35, a normal variable winning device 37, a second starting winning opening 97, a first special variable winning device 38, a second special variable winning device 39, and a second special variable winning device 39 arranged below the above. It is possible to aim for a prize in the general winning opening 35 arranged on the left side.

A gate switch 34a including a non-contact type switch for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal drawing start gate 34 is provided in the normal drawing start gate 34, and the game area 32
When the game ball driven into the ball passes through the start gate 34 of the normal drawing, it is detected by the gate switch 34a. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the number of normal figure start storages is an upper limit number (for example, four) based on the input of the game ball detection signal from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal figure start gate 34. ), Add the number of memory for starting the normal figure (+1)
), And one memory for starting a normal figure is stored in the RAM 111C. The number of stored numbers of the winnings for starting the normal drawing is displayed on the general drawing holding display of the batch display device 50. In addition, the hit determination random value (hit random value) for determining the result of the normal map variation display game extracted based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a is stored in the normal map start memory. It is supposed to be done.

Then, when there is a memory for starting the normal map and the normal variable display game can be started, that is, the normal variable display game is hit and the normal variable winning device 37 is converted to the open state, that is, the normal map variable display game is not running. If it is not in the hit state, the hit judgment random value stored in the first stored normal map start memory is compared with the judgment value stored in the ROM 111B to determine the hit / miss of the normal map variation display game. Then, the process of starting the normal map variation display game is performed. When the hit determination random number value matches the determination value, the normal map variation display game becomes a hit and a specific result mode (normal map specific result) is derived.

Further, as a process of executing the game control device 100, a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are predetermined in the normal map display unit provided in the batch display device 50 over a predetermined fluctuation time as a process of executing the normal figure variation display game. After performing the display during the fluctuation of the normal map, which is repeatedly displayed in the order of the above, the process of displaying the variable display game of the normal map, which stops and displays the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result, is performed. In addition, the general drawing display unit of the batch display device 50 is composed of the display device 41, and for example, numbers, symbols, character symbols, etc. are used as ordinary identification information, and after displaying the figures in a predetermined time variation, the result is stopped and displayed. It may be configured to be displayed.

When the result of the normal figure fluctuation display game is a hit, the lighting pattern, which is a special result mode, is stopped and displayed on the normal figure display unit of the batch display device 50, and the normal electric solenoid 37c is operated.
Control is performed to open the movable member of the normal variable winning device 37 for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds). That is, the game control device 100 serves as a conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member). If the result of the normal map variation display game is out of sync, the general display unit of the batch display device 50 is controlled to display a lighting pattern that is the result of the out of alignment.

Further, the winning ball to the first starting winning opening 36, the winning ball to the normal variable winning device 37, and the winning ball to the second starting winning opening 97 are the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 provided inside, respectively.
It is detected by the switch 37a and the start port 3 switch 97a. In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the first start winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 3
The first start memory that forms the start memory (special figure start memory) based on the winning of 7 is stored up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4), and the start is started based on the winning of the second start winning opening 97. Memory(
The second start memory forming the special figure start memory) is stored up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).
Based on the winning of the first starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, and the second starting winning opening 97, the jackpot random number value, the jackpot symbol random value, and each variable pattern random value are extracted and extracted as the starting memory information, respectively. The generated random value is RAM111C as the first start memory and the second start memory.
Is remembered in. Then, the stored number of the start memory is displayed on the first storage display unit (special figure 1 hold display) and the second memory display unit (special figure 2 hold display) for notifying the start winning number of the batch display device 50. At the same time, it is also displayed as a decorative special figure start memory display on the display device 41 of the center case 40.

The game control device 100 plays a special figure 1 variation display game on the special figure 1 display (first variation display device) of the batch display device 50 based on the first start memory, and the batch display device is based on the second start memory. The special figure 2 variable display game is played on the special figure 2 display device (second variable display device) of 50. The special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed at the same time, but while one special figure variable display game is being executed, the other special figure variable display game becomes the first special result (big hit). In that case, one of the special figure variation display games is terminated as a result other than the special result (missing result). In addition, if the other special figure variation display game has a second special result (small hit) during the execution of one special figure variation display game, the one is concerned until the end of the special gaming state based on the small hit. The special figure fluctuation display game of is interrupted.

That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 is a special figure based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning area) or the ordinary variable winning device 37 (first starting winning area). 1 It serves as a first execution control means for controlling execution of a variable display game (first special figure variable display game). Further, the game control device (game control means) 100 is a special figure 2 variable display game (second special figure variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening 97 (second start winning area). It serves as a second execution control means for controlling the execution of.

In the special figure 1 display and the special figure 2 display of the batch display device 50, after performing variable display, a predetermined result mode is stopped and displayed. Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 display or the special figure 2 display becomes a special result mode (big hit result mode) corresponding to the first special result and is a big hit. Then, it becomes the first special game state (so-called big hit state). If the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a small hit, the special figure 1 display or the special figure 2
The display mode of the display becomes a special result mode (small hit result mode) corresponding to the second special result, becomes a small hit, and becomes a second special gaming state (so-called small hit state). That is, the special figure 1 display of the batch display device 50 can display the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37. It serves as the first variable display means. Further, the special figure 2 display of the batch display device 50 can display the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening 97. Make.

Further, the game control device (game control means) 100 is in a jackpot game state (first special game state).
After the end of, control to generate a game state (specific game state) in which the game can proceed in a situation that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state (the probability of hitting is high and there is a general electric support). It is possible to do. That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 forms the specific game state generating means.

In addition, the display device 41 corresponds to the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game.
A decorative special figure variable display game that variablely displays a plurality of types of decorative identification information (numbers, symbols, character symbols, etc.) is being executed. The decorative special figure variable display game on the display device 41 includes a decorative special figure 1 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game and a decorative special figure 2 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game. Yes, these are displayed in separate display areas. Then, the variation display is performed according to the variation of the corresponding special figure variation display game, and the display corresponding to the result is performed according to the derivation of the result mode in the corresponding special figure variation display game.

That is, the display device 41 changes the decoration identification information in accordance with the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) and the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game). It serves as a decorative variation display means that can display a decorative special figure variation display game). It should be noted that different display devices may be used for the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game, or only one of the decorative special figure variable display games may be displayed. In addition, game machine 1
The special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41 without providing the special figure 1 display and the special figure 2 display of the batch display device 50 at 0.

In the game machine of the present embodiment, the probability of a small hit is higher in the special figure 2 variable display game, but in the case of the normal game state in which the probability is low, the variable time is used as the variable pattern of the special figure 2 variable display game. Very long (about 10 minutes) long variation is selected. As a result, in the normal game state, special figure 2
The execution of the variable display game becomes inefficient in terms of time, and the player does not select the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game aiming at the acquisition of a small hit in the normal gaming state. Therefore, in the normal game state, it is advantageous for the player to hit left and aim at the first start winning opening 36 to play the special figure 1 variable display game. The length variation time is about 10 minutes, but it may be longer or shorter (5 minutes, 50 minutes, 10 hours, etc.).

From the above, the game machine 10 of the present embodiment executes a game (special figure variation display game) based on the establishment of the starting condition, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, the game value is given to the player. A game machine capable of generating a special game state to be given, which is specified as a normal variable winning device 37 in which a starting condition is satisfied by winning a game ball, and a normal game state (normal game state ST24, first specific game state ST21). Game state (second specific game state ST22, third specific game state ST23)
The game state control means (game control device 100) is provided with a game state control means (game control device 100) capable of generating a special game state, and the game state control means has a predetermined result (in the present embodiment, a normal jackpot or a normal jackpot) among the special results of the game. Probability change A jackpot), a specific game state can be generated after the special game state is generated, and if the result of the game is a specific result (per support) different from the special result, it is special. It is configured so that a specific gaming state can be generated without generating a gaming state (see FIG. 70).

Therefore, since a specific gaming state (hobby support) occurs with a predetermined probability before the special gaming state occurs, it is necessary to suppress the amount of money spent by the player and the speed at which the number of balls held is reduced. Is possible, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.
Further, since the specific game state (hobby support) may occur not only after passing through the special game state but also without passing through the special game state, the transition timing of the game state increases. As a result, the interest of the game can be enhanced.
In addition, if the specific game state (Public power support) occurs frequently, the gambling may become too high, but since the ball output in the specific game state (Public power support) is included in the ball output rate and the accessory ratio, it is specified. If the game state (Public support) occurs frequently, it is necessary to suppress the ball output in the special game state. Therefore, even if the specific game state (Public electric support) occurs frequently, the gambling property does not become too high, and it is possible to calm the wave of the ball output.

Further, in the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the result of the game (special figure variation display game) is a specific result (
A setting means for setting a period corresponding to the specific result as a specific game period (number of times of support) for generating a specific game state (second specific game state ST22, third specific game state ST23) when the support is reached. (Game control device 100) is provided, and when the result of the game becomes a specific result during the occurrence of the specific game state, the setting means resets the specific game period being set and corresponds to the specific result. The period can be configured to be resettable (FIG. 31).
reference).
With this configuration, when a specific result (per support) is derived during the specific game state (second specific game state ST22, third specific game state ST23), the specific game period (number of support times) is set. Since it can be extended, the interest of the game is improved.

Further, in the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the result of the game (special figure variation display game) is a specific result (
A setting means for setting a period corresponding to the specific result as a specific game period (number of times of support) for generating a specific game state (second specific game state ST22, third specific game state ST23) when the support is reached. (Game control device 100) is provided, and when the result of the game becomes a specific result during the occurrence of the specific game state, the setting means adds the period corresponding to the specific result to the remaining period of the specific game period. The period can be configured to be resettable as a specific game period (see FIG. 32 (a)).
With this configuration, when a specific result (per support) is derived during the specific game state (second specific game state ST22, third specific game state ST23), the specific game period (number of support times) is set. Since it will be extended, the interest of the game will be improved.

Further, the game machine 10 of the present embodiment includes an effect control means (effect control device 300) for executing an effect related to a game (special figure variation display game), and the effect control means is after a special game state occurs. The generated specific game state (second specific game state ST22, third specific game state ST2)
3) and the specific gaming state that occurred without the special gaming state (second specific gaming state ST22,
It can be configured so that the effect can be executed in the third specific game state ST23).
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the specific gaming state (second specific gaming state ST22, third specific gaming state ST23).
The specific game state (second specific game state ST22) that occurred after the special game state occurred.
, 3rd specific game state ST23) and the specific game state (2nd specific game state ST22, 3rd specific game state ST23) that occurred without the special game state occurring. You may. As a result, whether it is the specific game state (second specific game state ST22, third specific game state ST23) generated based on the derivation of the special result (big hit), or the specific game generated based on the derivation of the specific result (per support). Since it is possible to suggest whether the state (second specific game state ST22, third specific game state ST23) by the effect executed during the specific game state, the interest of the game is improved.

In addition, the specific gaming state (second specific gaming state ST22) that occurred after the special gaming state occurred.
, 3rd specific game state ST23) and the specific game state (2nd specific game state ST22, 3rd specific game state ST23) that occurred without the special game state occurring. You may.
Specifically, for example, a specific game state (second specific game state ST22, third specific game state ST23) that occurred after the special game state occurred, and a specific game state that occurred without the special game state (2nd specific game state ST22, 3rd specific game state ST23). When the specific game period (number of times of support) is the same in the second specific game state ST22 and the third specific game state ST23), the same aspect of the effect may be executed. That is, for example, the production mode of the effect executed in the chance mode generated based on the derivation of the jackpot (normal jackpot in the case of the present embodiment) in which the corresponding number of supports is 100, and the corresponding number of supports is 100. Per support (B per support in the case of this embodiment)
It may be the same as the effect mode of the effect executed in the chance mode generated based on the derivation of.

Further, the game machine 10 of the present embodiment includes an instruction means (effect control device 300) for instructing the launch direction of the game ball which is advantageous for the player, and the instruction means indicates that the result of the game is a specific result (per support). In such a case, it is possible to configure the game to start the instruction of the firing direction in response to the start of the game to be executed next to the game (see FIGS. 53 and 58).
With such a configuration, it is possible to accurately indicate the launch direction of the game ball, so that the interest of the game is improved.
Of course, the game machine 10 of the present embodiment also has the effect illustrated in the second embodiment (the result is "per support").
It is possible to execute a special effect performed during the special figure variation display game, an additional effect performed after the end of the special figure variation display game whose result is "support hit", etc.). Further, also in the present embodiment, the modified examples in the second embodiment ([Modified example of support hit determination 1] to [Modified example of support hit determination 2], [Other modified examples 1] to [Other modified examples 11] ] Etc.) can be applied as appropriate.

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above embodiment as the gaming machine, and is, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, and the like. It is applicable to all game machines that use the game ball of. It is also possible to apply the present invention to slot machines. This slot machine is not limited to a slot machine that uses medals, and includes, for example, all slot machines such as a slot machine that uses a game ball. Further, the above-described modifications and configurations of the embodiments can be applied in combination as appropriate.

In addition, the embodiments disclosed this time should be considered to be exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and it is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

For example, the game machine 10 may be a game machine that executes the special figure 2 variable display game with priority over the special figure 1 variable display game, and the game machine 10 may perform the special figure 1 variable display game. 2 It may be a game machine that executes the variable display game with priority over the variable display game, or it may be a game machine that executes the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game in the order of winning. It may be a gaming machine capable of simultaneously executing the variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game.

Further, the game machine 10 is not limited to a game machine that does not simultaneously display the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory and the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the second start memory on the display device 41. .. That is, the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory and the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the second start memory may be simultaneously displayed on the display device 41.

Further, the game machine 10 is not limited to the game machine having a specific area (probability variation operation area). That is, the result of the special figure variation display game is a probabilistic jackpot, instead of generating a high probability state based on the fact that the game ball has flowed into the specific area (the specific area switch 38d has detected the game ball). Based on the fact, a high probability state may be generated.

10 Game machine 37 Ordinary variable winning device 100 Game control device (game state control means, setting means)
300 effect control device (effect control means, instruction means)

Claims (1)

In a game machine capable of executing a variable display game based on the establishment of a start condition and generating a special game state in which a game value is given to a player when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result.
Ordinary variable winning device and
A game state control means capable of generating a normal game state, a specific game state in which it is easier to win a prize in the normal variable winning device than the normal game state, and the special game state.
As the variation display game, a first variation display means capable of displaying a first variation display game based on the establishment of the first start condition among the start conditions, and a first variation display means.
As the variation display game, a second variation display means capable of displaying a second variation display game based on the establishment of the second start condition among the start conditions, and a second variation display means.
A game control means for controlling the first variation display means and the second variation display means,
An effect display means capable of displaying a decorative game that fluctuates and displays an identification symbol corresponding to the variable display game
The effect control means for controlling the effect display means is provided.
The game state control means
When the result of the variable display game is a predetermined result of the special results, the specific gaming state can be generated after the special gaming state is generated.
The effect control means is a game machine capable of executing an effect in the specific game state generated after the special game state occurs.

Images